project manual afb exch... · 2017. 8. 7. · grades, lines & levels 01051-1 aafes safety...

PROJECT MANUAL

RENOVATE EXCHANGE & DeCA COMMISSARY FAÇADE TYNDALL AFB, FLORIDA AAFES PN: 0941-17-000001 CONTRACTS: COMBINED WORK – ALL TRADES

BY:

DATE: 04 AUGUST 2017 SOLICITATION SPECIFICATIONS

Illinois Design Firm License Number 184-002661 Post Office Box 820 600 West Main Street ▪ Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5709 Fax 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5638

A R C H I T E C T S

RENOVATE EXCHANGE & DeCA COMMISSARY FAÇADE TYNDALL AFB, FLORIDA

AAFES PN: 0941-17-000001

ARCHITECT h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS

600 West Main Street Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901

618 457 5709 Fax 457 5638 E-mail [email protected]

PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANTS ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc. 413 West Main Street Post Office Box 581

Mt. Vernon, Illinois 62864 618 242 0473 Fax 242 2330

E-mail [email protected]

hmb PROJECT NO. 1701.0 04 AUGUST 2017

© 2017 h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS


AAFES PN: 0941-17-000001

ARCHITECT: h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS

Project Manual: Section 00860

All Sections of Division 1


Section 03300

Section 04850





Section 10711

SIGNATURE

CURRENT DATE 04 August 2017

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2018

Drawing Sheets: T-Sheets, D-Sheets, SA-Sheets & A-Sheets ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 16

SIGNATURE

CURRENT DATE 04 August 2017

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2017

Drawing Sheets: E-Sheets

PROJECT MANUAL TOC – Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1


AAFES PN: 0941-17-000001 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGES CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS List of Drawings 00860-1 SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Requirements of Tyndall AFB 01000-6 Summary of Work 01010-13 Substitutions Procedures (with CSI Form Attached) 01030-3 Cutting & Patching 01045-2 Grades, Lines & Levels 01051-1 AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures 01060-4 AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes 01090-8 Phasing 01140-2 Schedule of Values 01210-2 AAFES Progress Meetings 01220-2 Progress Payments 01230-3 Project Management & Coordination 01310-3 Construction Progress Schedules 01320-3 AAFES Weather Table 01331-2 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 01340-7 Quality Control 01400-3 Testing Laboratory Services 01410-4 AAFES Environmental Protection 01420-10 Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls 01500-9 Temporary Utilities 01510-5 AAFES Field Offices & Sheds 01590-3 Material & Equipment 01600-2 Storage & Protection 01620-2 Project Closeout (with DoD Form 1354 Attached) 01700-29 Cleaning 01710- 2 Project Record Documents 01720-2 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

Selective Demolition 02070- 5 Earthwork 02300-9 Sod Lawns 02910-7

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE WORK

Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-8

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Natural Thin Veneer Stone 04850-9

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400-8 Metal Fabrications 05500-15

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS

Rough Carpentry 06100-6 Fire Retardant Wood Treatment 06300-4

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems-Class PB 07240-10 Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only) 07536-7 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO) 07540-8 Flashing & Sheet Metal 07600-7 Building & Paving Joint Sealers 07920-5

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Lath & Plaster 09100-7 Gypsum Drywall Systems 09250-3 Painting 09900-5

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Fixed Cantilever Fascias 10711-5

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (NOT USED)

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 16060-2 Conduit 16111-4 Building Wire and Cable 16123-4 Boxes 16130-3 Grounding and Bonding 16170-2 Supporting Devices 16190-2 Electrical Identification 16195-2 Luminaires 16510-3 Testing 16950-2

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Section 00860 – LIST OF DRAWINGS

LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-1

SHEET NO. TITLE

T-1.00 Title Sheet/Index of Drawings T-1.01 Abbreviations & Codes D-2.00 Demolition Exterior Elevation D-5.00 Demolition Partial Roof Plan D-7.00 Demolition Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan SA-1.00 Column Footing Plan & Framing Details SA-2.00 Footing & Framing Details A-1.00 Partial Floor Plan A-1.10 Plan Details A-1.11 Plan Details A-2.00 Exterior Elevation A-2.01 Column Elevations A-4.00 Wall Sections - Exchange A-4.10 Wall Sections - Commissary A-4.20 Wall Details A-5.00 Partial Roof Plan A-5.10 Roof Details A-7.00 Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan E-1.00 Symbols and Schedules-Electrical E-1.01 Partial Floor Plans-Lighting All drawings dated: 04 August 2017 END 00860

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01000 – REQUIREMENTS OF TYNDALL AFB

REQUIREMENTS OF TYNDALL AFB 01000-1

1 GENERAL

A. Primary Point of Contact.

B. Work Schedule.

C. Protection of Government Property and Personnel.

D. Covering of Debris.

E. Utility Line Marking.

F. Waste Recycling.

G. Environmental Protection.

H. Contractor Installation Identification Credentials.

I. Work Clearance and Excavation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01010 – Summary of Work.

B. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

C. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

D. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

E. Section 01590 – AAFES Field Offices & Sheds.

F. Division 2 – Site Work.

G. Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions, a copy of which is included in the Solicitation Package.

1.3 EXCAVATION PERMIT

A. No excavation shall be done prior to receiving a Tyndall AFB Excavation Permit.

1. Permits shall be obtained from Base Civil Engineering (BCE). 2. If excavation is started without obtaining a permit, the contractor shall be held liable

for repairs of any broken utility lines and other damage resulting from the broken lines.

B. The Contractor shall request a permit a minimum of 30 days prior to scheduled start of digging.

C. Hand digging shall be required to locate utilities shown on the contract drawings or 3 feet on either side of locations identified by Tyndall AFB.


D. Excavation Permit information – Tyndall AFB:

1. POC: CE Customer Support-Service Desk. 2. Phone: (850) 283-4949.

1.4 WORK SCHEDULE

A. All work at Tyndall AFB shall be accomplished during normal working hours 0700 to 1600 hours exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and federal holidays unless other times are approved by the Contracting Officer, or otherwise stated in the contract.

1. Coordinate the work schedule with the Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB Civil Engineering (BCE).

2. Any deviation from this schedule will require 48 hours advance notice and approval by Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB BCE.

1.5 PROTECTION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL

A. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain all required barricades as directed by the Safety Office and the Contracting Officer.

B. Access drives and roadways shall remain clear at all times.

C. If road/lane closures or traffic interruption becomes necessary during the course of work:

1. Contractor shall submit for approval, 15 days prior to commencing work, a barricade and sign plan clearly showing work area, location, and type of sign to be placed for rerouting traffic.

2. Part VI, The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices will be used for traffic signing and barricades.

D. The Contractor shall conduct his operations to offer the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to public traffic.

1. All traffic shall be permitted to pass adjacent to work with as little delay as possible. 2. Where the nature of construction operations in progress or equipment, and machinery

in use are of character to endanger passing traffic, the contractor shall provide lights and signs, erect fences or barriers and station flaggers necessary to give adequate warning to avoid damage or injury to passing traffic.

3. Signs, flags, lights, warning and safety devices shall conform to applicable installation and state requirements.

1.6 SITE USE

A. Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain temporary construction fencing to separate construction areas from entry by unauthorized personnel including, but not limited to:

1. Building construction site. 2. Construction trailers. 3. Temporary storage trailers, sheds and lay-down areas. 4. Equipment parking areas. 5. Other areas subject to construction work under this Contract.

B. Contractor shall coordinate all site use areas with Tyndall AFB BCE, Contracting Officer and designated representative.


1. Submit detailed Site Use Plan for approval, 15 days prior to commencing work, indicating all areas to be temporarily fenced and indicate specific use proposed for all areas within fencing.

a. Indicate proposed location of all temporary construction trailers, storage trailers and sheds.

b. Provide temporary utility needs and proposed source for each.

2. Obtain written approval of proposed Site Use Plan from Tyndall AFB BCE and Contracting Officer prior to construction of temporary fencing or utilities.

1.7 DEBRIS DISPOSAL, DELIVERIES AND HAULING

A. Contractor shall use Haul Route as indicated on Drawing Sheet T-1.00.

B. Contractor and all subcontractors shall be required to cover all loads of debris before hauling them off from the Site.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup of all incidental debris that inadvertently falls onto pavements or other properties during hauling operations.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall abide by the environmental requirements of Tyndall AFB, the State of Florida and Federal Government.

1. Detailed requirements are set forth in Section 01420, AAFES Environmental Protection.

B. Contractor shall refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work for information pertaining to Hazardous Materials.

C. Vehicles and other powered equipment shall meet local air quality regulations for emissions.

1. Vehicles and equipment shall be mechanically sound and have all seals, grease rings, and other containment systems in place to ensure against leakage.

2. Drip pans shall be maintained such that overflow and spills do not occur. 3. There shall be no activities for equipment maintenance including oil changes, filter

replacements, or hydraulic equipment repair performed on Tyndall AFB Property.

D. Whenever a spill of oil or hazardous material is discovered, Contractor shall take immediate action to:

1. Stop the flow of product 2. Advise personnel of the incident. 3. Immediately shut down equipment and minimize sources of ignition. 4. Contain the spill. 5. Notify Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental Division immediately.

E. Contractor shall also prepare a formal “Spill Report” chronicling the events leading to the spill and the efforts to contain it.

1. This Spill Report shall be submitted to the Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental Division representative investigating the spill.

F. Contractor shall make submit monthly report of fuel consumption for each fuel burning unit, whether permitted or not, for all operational time throughout construction until Substantial Completion or when that unit is retired from service on this Project, whichever is longer.


1. Make monthly submittals to Tyndall AFB BCE. 2. At Substantial Completion submit the total amount of fuel used for each unit to Tyndall

AFB BCE substantiating monthly reports.

1.9 RECYCLING

A. Tyndall AFB promotes recycling of demolished materials and construction waste removed from construction.

1. Tyndall AFB encourages the Contractor to recycle as many materials as are feasible under this Contract.

2. Recycling will be at Contractors discretion and is suggested in an effort to reduce the amount of solid waste deposited in landfills.

B. Examples of demolished materials that Contractor may consider for recycling include, but are not limited to:

1. Concrete. 2. Steel studs. 3. Aluminum and/or steel, including trim work. 4. Cardboard. 5. Conduit. 6. Light fixture housings:

a. Ballasts shall be legally disposed of as potentially hazardous waste unless units have “NO PCB” designation.

b. Mercury containing lamps (fluorescent, mercury vapor, metal halide and high-pressure sodium) shall be legally disposed of as potentially hazardous waste.

7. Wiring. 8. Other materials as deemed appropriate by Contractor and acceptable to Tyndall AFB.

1.10 DISPOSAL

A. Contractor shall refer to applicable paragraphs in Section 01420, Environmental Protection for details pertaining to waste disposal including:

1. Hazardous waste generation, handling and disposal. 2. Non-hazardous waste disposal. 3. Normal construction debris disposal.

B. All excess soils and organic matter shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill as directed by Tyndall AFB BCE in conjunction with requirements set forth in Paragraph 1.12 below and in accordance with Section 01420.

C. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, or hazardous waste, all other solid waste shall be collected and disposed of off Tyndall AFB Property.

1. There shall be no accumulation of solid waste unless properly containerized or put within a fenced area to prevent windblown pollution.

2. No materials shall be put into dumpsters owned or managed by Tyndall AFB.

D. Only empty paint cans shall be allowed in Contractor furnished trash receptacles.

1. Paint cans are considered empty if paint comprises less than 1 inch or 3% by weight of the total capacity of the container, whichever is less.

2. If the residue in the container exceeds these limits, contact the Contracting Officer for disposal instructions.


E. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all concrete scheduled for removal shall be removed from the site and disposed of in approved landfill off Tyndall AFB property.

F. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all solid waste not specifically noted above shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill off Tyndall AFB property.

1.11 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL INSTALLATION IDENTIFICATION CREDENTIALS

A. Contractor shall comply with the following procedures for obtaining Installation identification passes for the Contractor’s personnel and subcontractors.

1. Contractor shall submit a written request on company letterhead stationary to the Tyndall AFB sponsoring entity (identified at the Pre-construction Meeting) specifying:

a. Contract number. b. Location of work site. c. Date entry to the Installation must begin and contemplated termination date of

entry. d. Names, date of birth (DOB) and social security numbers (SSN) of Contractor

and subcontractor employee requiring access to the Installation. e. The name of the individual who will submit the Request for Identification

Credentials for each employee for whom identification credentials are needed.

2. The Tyndall AFB sponsoring entity will submit information to authority having jurisdiction and that authority may:

a. Endorse the request. b. Attach a copy of the contract cover page and any other pages that provide

performance information, such as the need for and duration of access to the work site.

c. Forward this request to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office of the installation where the work is to be performed.

d. Provide appropriate blank Form to the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall be required to complete and submit Form and request for identification credentials, for each of the firm’s employees and for each subcontractor employee who must have access to the installation.

4. The Contractor shall also request appropriate Form for vehicle decals when the request for identification credentials is submitted.

5. To obtain the vehicle decal from the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, the Contractor shall produce:

a. A valid driver's license. b. Proof of financial responsibility or insurance c. Current vehicle registration.

B. Contractor employees, at all times while on a military installation shall wear visible identification either as a part of, or attached to, their outer clothing.

C. The identification shall clearly identify the individual as being a Contractor employee.

D. During performance of the contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining required identification for newly assigned personnel, and for prompt return of credentials and vehicle registration decals to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, for any employee who no longer requires access to the work site.


E. At the termination or completion of the contract, or upon expiration of credentials (if any such expirations are specified), the Contractor shall return all installation identification credentials and vehicle registration decals for all Contractor and subcontractor employees to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office.

1.12 SPECIAL TYNDALL AFB REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall obtain a FAA waiver, if required.

B. Contractor obtained Construction Waivers:

1. Regulations require that the use of cranes be approved by Tyndall AFB CES prior to use in construction.

2. Submit request to Action Officer at least 2-weeks prior to use of crane on Tyndall AFB property.

3. Request shall include:

a. Detailed specification information for any crane brought onto the Installation for use on this Project.

b. Site plan showing specific areas of Base where crane will be used in order to evaluate obstructions to critical flight paths for military aircraft.

C. Contractor shall submit request and provide crane specification information as directed by Tyndall AFB BCE prior to commencement of construction:

D. Upon evaluation by Tyndall AFB BCE, a permit to allow the use of a crane in strict coordination and compliance with all requirements and restrictions set forth may be issued.

E. Helicopters shall not be used to set roof mounted equipment at Tyndall AFB.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used).

3 EXECUTION (Not Used).

END 01000.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. Scope: The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, supervision, labor, equipment, materials necessary to perform all operations required to renovate the existing north façade of the AAFES Exchange/DeCA Commissary building, all in accordance with these specifications and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.

B. The work to be performed is located between Mall Road and Mississippi Road, Tyndall Air Force Base, Florida.

C. Principal Features:

1. Phased selective demolition of designated exterior elements indicated including but not limited to:

a. Roof elements:

1.) Sheet metal parapet wall coping covers. 2.) Sheet metal through wall overflow scuppers and spillouts. 3.) PVC through wall spillouts. 4.) Wood parapet blocking. 5.) Warranted parapet wall modified bitumen base flashings and cant

strips. 6.) Spud warranted modified bitumen roofing system for patching.

b. Building elements:

1.) Miscellaneous hooks and anchors protruding from face of existing concrete spandrel and wall panels.

2.) Miscellaneous plaster soffit cutting and removal for lighting fixtures.

c. Electrical work:

1.) Disconnects and circuiting work required for backlighted signage. 2.) Disconnects, fixture removal and circuiting work required for soffit

lighting fixtures.

2. Temporarily remove selected exterior elements and salvage for reinstallation in new construction:

a. Salvage, protect and store Exchange building signage including, but not limited to:

1.) Temporary hanging banner signage. 2.) Backlighted, spandrel mounted wall pylon signage. 3.) Backlighted, spandrel mounted X and EXCHANGE building entry

identification signage. 4.) Branch circuiting, conduit, power supply transformers and wiring

related to lighted signage for extension to new surfaces.

b. Salvage, protect and store wall mounted Café signage for reinstallation in new construction.

c. Salvage, protect and store wall mounted sconce lighting fixtures at both sides of Dining Room entrance for installation in new construction:


1.) Wall mounted sconce fixtures. 2.) Branch circuiting, conduit and wiring related to sconce fixtures for

extension to new surface.

d. Salvage, protect and store Commissary building signage including, but not limited to:

1.) Backlighted, spandrel mounted COMMISSARY building entry identification signage.

2.) Branch circuiting, conduit, power supply transformers and wiring related to lighted signage for extension to new surfaces.

e. Salvage, protect and store all plants and landscaping materials where required to implement new construction.

3. Phased new exterior construction indicated including but not limited to:

a. Roof work:

1.) Roof edge blocking. 2.) Fiberglass reinforced gypsum underlayment. 3.) Glass mat-faced overlay board. 4.) Thermoplastic membrane roofing (TPO). 5.) Cast iron parapet overflow drains.

a) PVC overflow drain piping to face of new surfaces. b) Cast aluminum lambs tongue spillout terminations.

6.) Cant strips. 7.) Overlap and patch warranted multi-ply modified bitumen roof system. 8.) Extend new multi-ply modified bitumen parapet base flashings. onto

existing and new vertical parapet wall surfaces.

a) Flash roof to existing and new vertical parapet wall surfaces. b) Flash roof and parapet walls to cast iron parapet overflow drains.

9.) Manufactured sheet metal coping cover and fascia systems with spillouts.

b. Building work:

1.) Excavation work for footings at new column/pilasters on grade. 2.) Cast-in-place concrete footings at column/pilaster bases on grade. 3.) Cast-in-place concrete column and column/pilaster plinth bases. 4.) Fabricated, though-bolted steel side plates at precast concrete

columns. 5.) Fabricated structural steel channel lookout structure at precast

concrete columns. 6.) Cold-formed metal structural framing. 7.) Rough carpentry work including, but not limited to:

a) APA rated plywood structural sheathing. b) Wood edge blocking. c) Adhesive anchors and wood furring.

8.) Structural aluminum fascia outrigger support brackets. 9.) Mechanically anchored thin veneer stone column pedestals. 10.) Fiberglass reinforced gypsum wall sheathing and air/weather barrier. 11.) Structural aluminum outriggers and fascia. 12.) EIFS spandrel, wall and column finishes.


13.) Plaster soffit patching. 14.) Sealant and painting. 15.) Reinstallation of salvaged signage. 16.) Finish grading and sod.

c. Electrical work:

1.) Backlighted building signage:

a) Extension of conduit and branch circuits. b) Signage power supply transformers. c) Extension of wiring to newly located building signage and

connections.

2.) Exterior lighting:

a) Extension of conduit and branch lighting circuits. b) Extension of conduit and standby lighting circuits. c) Soffit lighting fixtures.

D. General Provisions:

1. The Contractor is advised to take note of the following General Provisions of the Contract:

a. Cleaning up. b. Material and Workmanship. c. Accident Prevention. d. Existing structures on and surrounding site. e. Utilities and improvements. f. Operation and storage areas. g. Site investigation. h. Permits. i. Other responsibilities indicated in General Provisions.

2. A copy of the Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions is included in the Solicitation Package.

1.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Project will be constructed on an occupied Military Installation in and around an occupied facility.

B. Work performed under this Contract will require phasing and extensive coordination with AAFES and Tyndall AFB personnel to ensure the health, safety and welfare of AAFES and DeCA employees, customers and Base personnel.

C. Contractor shall protect and/or temporarily remove all plants and landscape materials where required to implement new construction.

1. Areas designated Planting Beds shall be protected at all times during construction activities.

2. Return Planting Beds and landscaping to original condition to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB BCE.

D. Contractor shall protect all site paving and lawn areas from damage due to construction work and construction activities.

1. Protect all roadways, drives, parking areas and sidewalks from damage. 2. Protect all lawn areas from damage and construction traffic.


3. Restore site paving and lawn areas to original condition to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB BCE.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for the construction of temporary barricades, barriers and services as indicated to:

1. Protect occupants and pedestrians from injury. 2. Protect vehicles and existing construction to remain from damage. 3. Maintain entrance to both AAFES and DeCA occupied spaces. 4. Maintain security of the Site and the Building at all times.

F. Refer to paragraph 1.27 of this Section and provisions of Section 01420, Environmental Protection for information pertaining to encounter of potentially hazardous materials.

1.3 SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General working hours on Base are from 0700 to 01600 hours.

B. No streets will be blocked without BCE approval.

C. Contractor shall immediately clean up any debris tracked onto streets resulting from this construction operation.

D. Construction areas, including equipment, temporary office and storage areas, shall be kept clean and neat.

E. No burning is permitted on the Base.

F. Contractor shall determine and apply for FAA permitting if necessary.

1.4 UTILITIES (WATER, SEWER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)

A. Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.

B. AAFES will pay for utilities consumed within the building and related exterior construction work.

C. Contractor will be required to pay designated utility companies the prevailing rate for connection fees and utilities consumed for this Project as needed for temporary offices and storage sheds (water, sewer, gas and electricity).

D. Tyndall AFB utilities information:

1. Water:

a. Owner: Gulf Coast Electric Cooperative. b. POC: Ms. Francis Hinson. c. Phone: (850) 913-3732.

2. Sewer:

a. Owner: tyndall AFB (J & J Utilities). b. POC: Mr. Tim Lewis. c. Phone: (850) 283-4884.


3. Natural gas:

a. Owner: TECO. b. POC: Mr. Mike McGuire. c. Phone: (850) 258-1223.

4. Electrical power:

a. Owner: Gulf Coast Electric Cooperative. b. Ms. Francis Hinson. c. Phone: (850) 913-3732.

5. Communication.

a. Owner: Tyndall AFB. b. POC: Carl Callipo. c. Phone: (850) 283-3811.

6. Data/LAN:

a. Owner: Tyndall AFB. b. POC: Carl Callipo. c. Phone: (850) 283-3811.

1.5 LAYING OUT WORK

A. Layout:

1. Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by Contractor.

2. Discrepancies between Drawings, specifications, and Conditions shall be referred to the Contracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed.

3. Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction contemplated by the construction documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in any way affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him.

1. Any discrepancy shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer or designated representative for verifications and adjustment.

2. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on Contractor's part to comply with this function shall be done at his expense.

D. Field Dimensions:

1. The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate the general design and arrangement of all apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc. necessary to complete the work required.

2. Exact location or arrangement of equipment may be subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost to AAFES.

3. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, and Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.


1.6 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK

A. Carefully check the site where project is to be constructed and observe any overhead wires and equipment.

1. Any such work shall be temporarily or permanently moved, replaced, or protected as required to facilitate construction, whether or not shown or specified.

B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground utilities and improvements.

1. Included will be potential under slab conduit beneath the building floor slab and locations shall be determined prior to any saw cutting of the existing concrete slab.

2. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such utilities and improvements at all times during construction of this project.

C. In coordination with Tyndall AFB BCE, Contractor shall be responsible for determining locations of underground lines that could be damaged by construction of this project.

1.7 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES

A. Contractor shall make utility connections “Hot/Live” whenever possible.

B. When “Hot/Live” connections are not feasible, Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities.

1. Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service.

2. Interruption shall be by written approval from utility owner. 3. Existing utility services may only be interrupted when approved, in writing, by the

Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB BCE.

C. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB BCE facilities engineer in writing at least ten (10) business days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted.

1. Interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. 2. Depending upon the activities at the facility that require continuous service from

the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor.

a. In such cases the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirement of demand for the utility including nights, weekends or holidays.

b. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility services shall be as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB BCE.

1.8 EXCAVATION

A. Prior to commencing any excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a valid Excavation Permit from Tyndall AFB BCE Offices.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the necessary signatures and coordination for the permit.

C. Forms shall be obtained from Tyndall AFB BCE by contacting POC listed in Section 01000.


1.9 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES

A. Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices by Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at all points of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.

B. Refer to Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls for additional information and provide detailed Traffic Control Plan for review and approval by Contracting Officer and Tyndall AFB Safety Officer.

1. Include provisions for transportation and delivery of materials and equipment to site without interference with normal traffic operations.

2. Include provisions for controlling and directing customers on site for ingress and egress to and from gasoline dispensing islands and parking without interference with other site functions.

1.10 WELDING PERMIT

A. Prior to commencing any welding, soldering or other open flame work, Contractor shall obtain a welding permit from Tyndall AFB Fire Department.

1. POC: John Powers. 2. Phone: (850) 283-2909.

1.11 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICES

A. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding equipment, electric arc welding, etc., are employed for job accomplishment, the following procedures are mandatory:

1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are not present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of any compound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present. 3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or

dispersion of molten metal. 4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets,

wetting of surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backing and portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Base Fire Department POC listed above, 24 hours ahead of usage.

1.12 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage.

B. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.

C. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for storing flammable materials and paints.

1. No storage will be permitted within the building.

D. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods.


E. Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA Nos. 10 and 241, however, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be available for each building.

F. Fire Codes: Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, Army Fire Regulations and Base Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on Base.

G. Contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is being performed.

1. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of noncombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal.

2. When temporary heating devices are used they shall be monitored when operating when other workmen are not on the premises.

1.13 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract:

1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.). 2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by AAFES.

a. If any new signage is indicated AAFES will furnish and install. b. Contractor shall be responsible for extending hardwired power and low

voltage wiring to new signs, where indicated, and provide final connections to designated building circuiting.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordination of all work including that work indicated to be performed by others.

1.14 LINING OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall, and ceiling materials that:

1. The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible. 2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically

placed wherever possible including:

a. Grills and registers. b. Lighting fixtures. c. Equipment. d. Miscellaneous items not specifically address but requiring alignment for

aesthetic purpose.

3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer or designated representative to determine the most satisfactory arrangement.

4. The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades.


1.15 INTEGRATING WORK

A. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.

B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacent property.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary.

D. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Army and Air Force Exchange Service.

1.16 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIES

A. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks, etc., that are damaged or removed due to required excavations or other construction work, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.17 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

A. Drawings showing location of equipment, wiring, etc., are diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit installation in the location shown.

B. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer or designated representative’s immediate attention and the relocation determined in a joint conference.

C. The Contractor will be held responsible for relocating any items without first obtaining the Contracting Officer's approval.

D. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.18 OVERLOADING

A. The Contractor shall be held responsible for excessive overloading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon.

B. No loads shall be placed on new concrete before concrete has attained permanent and safe strength.

1.19 STANDARDS

A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendment or supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type, class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.


B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these specifications.

1. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and standard, they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the United States Government and are available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.

2. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition including amendments thereto.

3. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, and method of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Department of Commerce.

4. Where A.S.T.M. Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative specifications, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of testing issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.20 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

A. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural materials are specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificate covering conformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications and Commercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items.

B. Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer and designated representative for all items so specified.

1.21 OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGE & DeCA

A. The Exchange and DeCA shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during progress of the work.

B. Access shall be allowed at all times to the Exchange, DeCA and its own Contractors in the endeavor.

1.22 TESTS AND REPORTS

A. See Specification Sections for detailed requirements of testing and reporting.

B. Refer to outline requirements in Section 01400, Quality Control and Section 01410, Testing Laboratory Services.

1.23 REFERENCES

A. All references to the word "Government" in the specifications shall mean Army and Air Force Exchange Service (AAFES), DeCA and Tyndall AFB.

B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".

C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item. 2. Base or Facility: Location on which Project is being constructed. 3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation

of the concessions such as Barber Shop or Laundry/Dry Cleaners.


4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working drawings and specifications.

a. h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street, Suite 2 Post Office Box 820 Carbondale, Illinois 62901

618.457.5709

5. AAFES or Exchange: Army and Air Force Exchange Service. 6. Inspection Agency: Project Inspector contracted by AAFES and/or Contractor.

1.24 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos (ACM), lead-based paint (LBP), PCB’s or other hazardous materials.

B. Removal or disposal of toxic materials including asbestos containing material (ACM) is included in this Contract where specifically designated herein.

1.25 SUSPECT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Existing Conditions:

1. Roofing materials are relatively new and under warranty. 2. It is not anticipated that new warranted roofing materials will be ACM.

3. Original modified bitumen field roofing materials were previously tested and found

not to be ACM. 4. No evidence exists that the original base and parapet flashing materials were

tested at that time field roofing materials were tested. 5. Contractor is advised that remnants of original modified roofing materials could be

present under newer warranted base and parapet flashings.

B. Contractor shall include in proposal the cost of a licensed Asbestos inspector to inspect, sample, test and report all existing base, parapet or other suspect materials as part of this work with inspection, sampling and testing to be performed in sequence with roofing demolition work.

1. Include separate line item cost in proposal for cost of specified inspection, sampling and testing.

C. Contractor shall also include in proposal the cost to legally abate, haul and dispose of existing base and parapet flashing materials should inspection, sampling and testing result in positive findings for ACM.

1. Include in proposal any additional costs that would be incurred by Contractor to abatement, hauling and legally dispose of all base and parapet flashing materials including all related paperwork in compliance with State of Florida and Federal Rules and Regulations governing this work.

2. Contractor shall use these monies to legally abate, haul and dispose of any ACM found by inspection at no additional cost to AAFES, DeCA or Tyndall AFB.

3. Include separate line item cost in proposal for cost of legal abatement, hauling and disposal.

D. Should Contractor provided inspection result in negative findings for ACM, Contractor shall credit abatement, hauling and legal disposal costs back to AAFES by Amendment to the Contract for Construction.


1.26 DISCOVERED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Should the Contractor, during performance of work on this Project, encounter or discover suspect hazardous materials, other than base and parapet flashing materials, that were not anticipated to be disturbed but require removal prior to progressing with work, Contractor shall:

1. Notify the Contracting Officer, designated representative and Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental in writing stating the following prior to disturbance of such material(s):

a. Type and location of suspect material encountered. b. Extent of suspect material(s). c. Need for disturbance of such material(s). d. Options to avoid disturbing material(s).

2. Do not proceed with construction in areas of suspect hazardous materials without written direction from Contracting Officer.

B. Refer to provisions of Section 01420, Environmental Protection for additional information and procedures.

1.27 HAZARDOUS WASTE STREAM MATERIALS

A. Following is a summary of materials that may be potentially hazardous and shall require special precautions for legal demolition and disposal:

1. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's):

a. Lighting ballasts.

2. Mercury Containing Lamps and Devices:

a. Exterior HID lamps. b. Mercury vapor lamps.

B. PCB ballasts shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

C. Mercury containing lamps and devices shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

D. Contractor shall use caution during demolition operations to prevent disturbance of any unknown hazardous materials that are suspected to contain asbestos, lead based paint or other suspect materials that may be discovered as work progresses.

1.28 SUBMISSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer photographs taken on or about the first of every month, showing the general conditions of the work as viewed from the north, south, east, west where applicable and interior.

B. Photographs shall be digital (minimum of 1200 pixels x 1600 pixels [2 MB]) with a minimum of twenty (20) 3" x 5" standard prints accompanying each Application for Payment.


C. Each print shall be identified by date of exposure, project title, and AAFES Project Number, location and direction taken.

D. The Contractor may also submit a video of the above requirements as an option to photographs.

1.29 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS FURNISHED

A. After Contract award, and for construction purposes only, the Contractor will be provided:

1. A record set of “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications. 2. A reproducible set of the “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications in

electronic format (CD/.pdf)

B. Additional copies will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END 01010.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01030 – SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01030-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Substitution submission procedures.

B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. AAFES Solicitation/Proposal/Award Form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

B. AAFES Instructions to Offerors and Conditions of Proposal/Awards form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

C. Individual specification Sections relevant to the work required under each option.

1.3 GENERAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. List proposed substitutions on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form.

B. Substitutions listed on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at AAFES's discretion.

C. Accepted substitutions will be identified by Solicitation Amendment.

D. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each option.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING SOLICITATION

A. Prior to solicitation closing, Contracting Officer will consider written requests to amend Solicitation Documents to ADD products not specified provided such requests are received with sufficient advance time to issue an Amendment, which must be issued 10 days prior to proposal date.

1. Requests received without sufficient advance time to review and be incorporated into an Amendment will not be considered with timing as determined by Contracting Officer.

2. If a request is approved, an Amendment will be issued indicating approval.

B. No substitutions will be considered after award of Contract except under one or more of the following conditions:

1. Required for compliance with final interpretations of code requirements or insurance regulations.

2. Unavailability of specified product, through no fault of Contractor. 3. Subsequent information discloses inability of specified product to perform properly

or fit designated space. 4. Manufacturer or fabricator refusal to certify or guarantee performance of product

as specified for intended use.

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01030-2

1.5 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. In the event a material substitution is to be submitted, the Offeror will follow the procedure outlined in Paragraphs A1 thru 3 below and Paragraph B1 thru 6:

1. Proposing Offeror shall submit three copies of request for substitution. 2. Request shall be accompanied by complete data on proposed substitution

substantiating compliance with Contract Documents including product identification and description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified.

3. Request shall be accompanied by accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product specified, whether or not modification or Contract sum is to be a consideration.

B. Requests for substitution based on the above, when forwarded by Offeror to Contracting Officer, are understood to mean that Offeror:

1. Represents that he/she has personally investigated proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to product specified.

2. Represents that he/she has coordinated the substitute product with subcontractors for compatibility of installation into Project and that no additional costs will be incurred due to acceptance of the substitution.

3. Will provide same guarantee for substitution that he/she would for specified product.

4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution.

5. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution, making such changes as may be required for work to be completed in all respects.

6. Product substitutions price increases will not be considered, only price decreases.

C. Substitutions will not be considered if:

1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing submittals without formal request required above.

2. For implementation they require a substantial revision of Contract Documents in order to accommodate use.

3. They are unacceptable to the Contracting Officer.

D. NO FURTHER SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE PERMITTED AFTER CONTRACT AWARD.

E. Refer to AAFES Proposal Substitution Form (CSI) attached to the end of this Section.



END 01030. ATTACHMENT:

CSI PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION FORM (1 page)

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01045 – AAFES CUTTING & PATCHING

CUTTING & PATCHING 01045-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.


A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.

B. Section 01340 - Submittals.

C. Section 07270 - Firestopping.

D. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration any undesignated item of work that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of AAFES or separate contractor.

B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of AAFES or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.

CUTTING & PATCHING 01045-2

C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work.

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

C. Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering work.

3.3 CUTTING

A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.

B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.

F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.

1. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval from Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

D. Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

H. Refinish surfaces:

1. Match adjacent finish. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. 3. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END 01045.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01051 – GRADES, LINES & LEVELS

GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 01051-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Contractor provide:

1. Lay out of Work. 2. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:

1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2. Section 01010 –Summary of Work. 3. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 4. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor shall coordination and supervision of overall layout of all Work.

B. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements for Work.

C. Employ qualified personnel to perform Work.

1.3 Contracting Officer will furnish:

1. Locations, dimensions and data pertaining to other improvements so far as known (shown of drawings).

2. Information and contact person for the purpose of Contractor coordination and supervision of work by others, if any.

END 01051.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01060 – SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES

SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES 01060-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor required health and safety plan.

1. Contractor is responsible for risk assessment plan. 2. Contractor shall maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk

assessment of 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a 40-hour week.

B. Construction Hazard Plan.


A. Submittals - Section 01340

1. Construction Hazard Plan. 2. Job Safety and Health Plan. 3. Emergency Response Plan.

B. Environmental Protection - Section 01420.

C. Investigation Derived Waste (IDW) Soils & Report - Section 02020.

D. Record Documents - Section 01720.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication:

a. EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual (Oct. 92)

2. OSHA 1910 R.E.G. - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.120

B. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Tyndall AFB approval - The following items shall be submitted for Tyndall AFB approval:

1. Designation of Safety Representative: The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the overall supervision of all accident prevention activities.

a. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safety measures and instructions are actually being applied.

b. This person shall be on site at all time that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures. 3. All other employees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training

requirements for their job capacity.


B. Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:

1. Job Hazard Analysis:

a. Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at the pre-construction conference.

b. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potential hazards that could arise during the course of the work.

c. For each hazard, the applicable paragraph of EM 385-1-1 shall be cited.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan:

a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the Pre-construction conference.

b. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whatever provisions are necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHA standards.

c. The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation portion of construction and will be specific to all Hazardous Materials (Haz-Mats), and incorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuous vapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibition against the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

d. The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:

1.) The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degradation products addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.

2.) Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situation requires.

a) Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vapor barriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3.) Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor for construction areas identified by the installation as areas of known hazards only.

a) These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the responsibility of the Contractor.

b) This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

4.) Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as follows:

a) Must be kept on site, and must be written. b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for

each site task and operation (to be supplied by the installation).

c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120).

d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by employees for each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).

e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).

f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring, environmental sampling techniques, instruments to be used (their maintenance and calibration).


g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to be coordinated with the installation.

h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).

i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).

j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or program equivalent).

k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of 1910.120).

l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for all employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.

m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 training requirements for supervisors).

n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and after consultation with the Tyndall AFB Contracting Officer.

e. Hazard Response Plan: The planned, unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazards as transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressed within an Emergency Response Plan (EMR) by Contractor and all subcontractors.

f. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the contractor (sample provided).

g. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all materials in use.

1.5 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGS

A. Schedule safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor personnel on a monthly basis in conjunction with Progress/Pay Meetings.

1. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. 2. Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the

Contracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.

1.6 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING

A. Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Section 2, EM 385-1-1.

B. Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after the incident and will be followed by a copy of U.S. Army Investigation Accident Report (DA Form 285).



3 EXECUTION

3.1 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall comply with EM-1-1 and all provisions of this section during the life of the contract.

3.2 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)

A. All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas.

B. Contractor shall post the area in accordance with Paragraph 7.C.03, EM 385-1-1 and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within the limits of the work site.

END 01060.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01090 – SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES

SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES 01090-1

1 GENERAL


A. Reference Standards.

B. Licenses and Permits.

C. Safety.

D. Affirmative Procurement Program.

E. Ozone Depleting Substances.

F. Lead Based Paint.

G. Cleaning & Debris Control.

H. Nuisance Dumping & Polluting Activities.

I. Stormwater Pollution Prevention.

J. Excavation at IRP Sites.

K. Contaminated Soil.

L. Suspected Hazardous Materials.

M. Oil-Filled or Impregnated Electrical Components.

N. Spill Response and Reporting.

O. Waste Disposal and Environmental Protection.


A. Section 01000 – Requirements of Tyndall AFB.

B. Section 01010 – Summary of Work.

C. Section 01060 – Safety Policies & Procedures.

D. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

E. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01400 – Quality Control.

G. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services.

H. Section 01420 – Environmental Protection.

I. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

J. Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds.

K. Section 01600 – Material & Equipment.

L. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

M. Federal, State and Local Codes and Ordinances take precedence over these Specifications and Drawings where conflicts occur, unless the Drawings or Specifications call for more stringent requirements.


1. Notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative of conflicts in writing.

N. Comply with all applicable laws, building and construction codes, OSHA Safety and Health Regulations and applicable requirements of any governmental agency under whose jurisdiction this Work is being performed.

O. Obtain a copy of standards referenced in the various Specification Sections.

1. Maintain copy at the jobsite during execution of Work to which the standard applies.

P. Construction that is not governed by the contract specifications will be governed by the more stringent provisions of the latest published edition or statute adopted edition, of the following applicable codes, regulations and standards.

1. ACI – American Concrete Institute.

a. ACI 318-11 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. b. ACI 530-11 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.

2. ADA – 2010 Standards for Accessible Design, Department of Justice, 15 September 2010.

3. ADAAG – Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.

4. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction.

a. AISC 360-10, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

5. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute,

a. AISI S100-07, Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members, with Supplement 2, Standards for Cold Formed Steel Framing.

6. ANSI – American National Standards Institute. 7. ASCE/SEI – American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute.

a. ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

8. ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.

a. Energy Conservation in New Buildings Design (ASHRAE 90.1). b. Standard for Natural and Mechanical Ventilation (No. 62).

9. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 10. ASPE – American Society of Plumbing Engineers. 11. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials, Standards and Certifications. 12. ATBCB – Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 13. AWS – American Welding Society.

a. AWS D1.1-1.4, Structural Welding Code, latest edition. b. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum, latest edition.

14. CFR – Code of Federal Regulations. 15. CPSP – Consumer Products Safety Commission.

a. Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, 1981 (As Amended).

16. CRSI – Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

a. Manual of Standard Practice, 2009 edition.

17. EPA – Environmental Protection Agency.

a. Oil Pollution Prevention, 40 CFR, Ch.1, Part 112, 1July 2004 Edition.


18. FM – Factory Mutual, Standards and Certifications. 19. IBC – International Building Code, 2015 Edition. 20. IECC – International Energy Conservation Code, Latest Edition. 21. IMC – International Mechanical Code, 2015. 22. IPC – International Plumbing Code, 2015. 23. MIL-STD-3007F – Standard Practice for unified Facilities Criteria and Unified

Facilities Guide Specifications, 15 February 2006. 24. NAAQS – National ambient Air Quality Standards. 25. NCMA – National Concrete Masonry Association.

a. Specifications for the Design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry.

26. NESHAPS – National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. 27. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association.

a. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015. b. NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2013. c. NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2013. d. NFPA 17A, Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013. e. NFPA 54, ANSI Z223.1-2015 National Fuel Gas Code, 2015. f. NFPA 58, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, 2011. g. NFPA 70, National Electric Code, 2017. h. NFPA 72, Fire Alarm Code, 2016. i. NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. j. NFPA 96, Installation of Equiment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease

Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, 2014. k. NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration & Demolition Operations,

2013.

28. NLMA – Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association.

a. National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings.

29. OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act.

30. PCA – Portland Concrete Association.

a. Concrete Floors on Grade.

31. PCI – Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. 32. UFAS – Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, U.S. Architectural and

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 33. UFC – Unified Facilities Criteria.

a. UFC 1-200-01, General Building Requirements, 20 June 2016. b. UFC 1-300-08, Criteria for Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real Property,

16 April 2009 (including Change 2, August 2011). c. UFC 3-120-10, Interior Design 15 June 2006 (including Change 1, July

2007). d. UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering, 1 June 2013. e. UFC 3-202-02, Landscape Architecture, 23 February 2009 (including Change

1, November 2009). f. UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact Development, 1 June 2015 (including Change 1,

1 February 2016). g. UFC 3-220-01, Geotechnical Engineering, 1 November 2012.


h. UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering, 1 June 2013 (including Change 3, 12 September 2016.

i. UFC 3-310-01, Structural Load Data, 25 May 2005. j. UFC 3-310-04, Seismic Design for Buildings, 1 June 2013 (including Change

1, 20 June 2016. k. UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical Engineering, 1 July 2013 (including Change 1,

October 2015). l. UFC 3-410-01, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, 1 July

2013 (including Change 3, 25 January 2017). m. UFC 3-420-01, Plumbing Systems, 25 October 2004 (including Change 10,

26 October 2015). n. UFC 3-501-01, Electrical Engineering, 6 October 2015. o. UFC 3-530-01, Interior and Exterior Lighting Systems and Controls, 1 April

2015 (including Change 3, 1 June 2016. p. UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities, 8 August 2016

(including Change 1, 28 November 2016). q. UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, 09

February 2012 (including Change 1, 1 October 2013). r. UFC 4-010-02, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Buildings

(FOUO), 09 February 2012. s. UFC 4-021-01, Design and O and M, Mass Notification Systems, 9 April 2008

(including Change 1, January 2010).

34. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Standards and Certifications. 35. Water Conservation Requirement of the Federal Energy Policy Act, 1992. 36. Other applicable codes and standards as applicable or as referenced by the

individual specification Sections.

1.3 LICENSES AND PERMITS

A. Contractor shall obtain and maintain current for the duration of this Contract, all required Federal, State and local licenses and permits.

1. All associated fees and taxes shall be paid by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

B. Obtain from Base security all required vehicle and entry permits as specified in Section 01010, Project Summary.

C. Obtain any additional permits as required by Tyndall AFB BCE at no additional cost to the Government.

1.4 SAFETY

A. Comply with all Federal and State regulations concerning safety of personnel and equipment.

1. All Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats and steel toe safety shoes while on the project site.

2. All Contractor personnel shall wear hearing protection (ear muffs or ear plugs) when required by OSHA regulations.

B. Ensure that lock out, tag out procedures are established and used as directed by 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Comply with all safety, traffic and protection requirements in effect on Tyndall AFB.


D. Provide safety barriers around open excavations, openings in floors and other hazards created by the Contractor’s activities.

E. The Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to cease activities that are deemed unsafe.

1.5 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT PROGRAM

A. These standards apply to all new construction, demolition, rehabilitation, alteration, modification, repair, and maintenance of existing facilities.

B. In an effort to comply with the affirmative procurement requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) and Executive Order 13101, the government strongly promotes the use of the recycled and recovered materials and products identified in the Environmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines.

C. Recycled and recovered materials and products shall be used throughout the project in quantities as set forth in the technical Sections of the specifications and subject to compliance with performance requirements of these specifications.

1.6 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. No ozone depleting substances (refrigerants or any other compounds) shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.7 LEAD BASE PAINT

A. No paint with a lead content of 0.06 percent or greater shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.8 CLEANING AND DEBRIS CONTROL

A. During the term of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove any materials and equipment that are not required for the completion of the work as promptly as possible.

1. All debris shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 2. The Contractor shall take particular care to eliminate any hazards created by his

operations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused by his debris without additional cost to the Government.

C. The Contractor shall maintain at all times during his work at this Project Site a strict windblown debris control program.

1. This program shall ensure no windblown debris or other debris from his work shall contaminate or interfere with any access to or operation of any facility or any parking area, road or street.

1.9 NUISANCE DUMPING AND POLLUTING ACTIVITIES

A. Polluting, dumping, or discharging of any harmful, nuisance, or regulated materials (such as concrete truck washout, vehicle maintenance fluids, residue from saw cutting operations, solid waste or hazardous substances) into building drains, site drains, streams, waterways, holding ponds or to the ground surface is not permitted.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages resulting from dumping or discharges.


2. Contractor shall conduct activities in such a fashion to avoid creating any legal nuisance, including but not limited to, suppression of noise and dust, control of erosion, and implementation of other measures as necessary to minimize off site impacts of work activities.

B. Fugitive dust emissions (airborne dust generated by vehicles operating on unpaved surfaces, transfer or transport of dust producing materials, etc.) shall be controlled at the construction site, along haul routes and at staging areas.

1. Water spraying shall be conducted as necessary to minimize fugitive dust generation.

1.10 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

A. Prior to clearing, grading or excavating, the Contractor shall notify the Florida Department of the Environmental Protection, Army Corps of Engineers and Northwest Florida Water Management District.

B. Coordinate required onsite Pre-Site Construction Meeting a minimum of seven (7) days prior to commencement of any site work.

C. If contaminated ground water should be encountered during excavation activities Contractor shall notify Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental immediately and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

1.11 CONTAMINATED SOIL

A. If unexpected contaminated soil is encountered while performing work, stop work immediately, notify Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Do not resume work until approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.12 SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Any suspect hazardous materials encountered during demolition or construction shall immediately be brought to the attention of Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Work shall not resume until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that the materials are not hazardous.

C. Should suspect materials be found to be hazardous, Contractor shall immediately take steps to contain the material, so further damage and contamination does not occur.

D. Contractor shall then submit a proposal for removal.

1.13 OIL-FILLED OR IMPREGNATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Notify Base Environmental Safety Office before demolition or installation of any oil-filled electrical equipment.

B. All transformers and light ballasts, unless labeled “No PCBs”, shall be disposed through the Base Hazardous Material and Waste Handling facility.


1.14 SPILL RESPONSE AND REPORTING

A. Spills of hazardous waste, hazardous materials or non-regulated substances such as oils, antifreeze, grease, latex paint, hydraulic fluid, etc. shall immediately be reported.

1. If a spill occurs after normal working hours, or on a weekend or holiday, report spills to the Installation Fire Department.

B. Contractor is encouraged to have a supply of absorbent pads on-site to aid in immediate clean-up of smaller spills, such as oil, coolant or hydraulic fluid leaks from vehicles or equipment.

C. Spill notification placards are to be placed on the job site prior to construction.

D. Contractor shall develop a spill plan.

E. The format for the plan shall be approved by Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental prior to construction.

1.15 WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all Federal, State, local laws, and regulations, ordinances and standards related to environmental pollution control and abatement in effect and the specific requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. All hazardous wastes as defined in 40 CFR, Part 261, shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR, Parts 260-268.

C. The Contractor is responsible for properly storing, marking, labeling, securing and transporting hazardous wastes.

D. All hazardous wastes shall be collected in contractor furnished DOT/UN approved containers and taken to JBSA-Sam Houston Hazardous Waste Facility for disposal.

1. Call the Hazardous Waste Facility prior to transporting wastes to the facility to coordinate delivery of the waste materials.

2. The Contractor shall not store hazardous waste on Post for more than 30 days.

E. Any previously unidentified suspected hazardous materials encountered during performance of the work of the contract shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. All general construction wastes, other than those specifically allowed, or required, to be disposed of on the Post shall be legally disposed at an off-base sanitary landfill.

G. Contractor shall refer to Waste Disposal Form attached at the end of this Section.



END 01090.


(BASE) WASTE DISPOSAL Contractor shall obtain all permits required by federal, state and local laws for the construction activities involved.

Contractor shall perform all work in such a manner as to minimize the polluting of air, water or land and shall, within reasonable limits, control noise and the disposal of solid waste materials, as well as other pollutants.

Contractor shall ensure that all construction, repair, maintenance operations and practices and waste disposal performed under this contract shall be in strict compliance with all applicable city, county, state and federal environmental laws and regulations.

1. Hazardous and Non-hazardous Waste Disposal: There are no known existing sources of hazardous waste involved with this project. If the Contractor generates or discovers suspected hazardous waste it shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for review and direction on how to proceed with handling and disposal. As part of the proposed implementation above and prior to on-site construction, the Contractor shall submit for approval, a plan for storing, characterizing and disposing of hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials resulting from the work under this contract. Waste includes, but is not limited to, paint waste, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers. If any waste material is dumped in unauthorized areas, the Contractor shall remove the materials and restore the area to the condition of the adjacent undisturbed areas. Where directed and approved by the Contracting Officer, contaminated ground shall be excavated, characterized, stored, disposed of and replaced with suitable fill material at the expense of the Contractor. All waste disposal shall be in strict accordance with local, state and federal requirements and regulations. Waste paint, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers shall be disposed of off base by the Contractor, at the Contractors’ expense. Any soil contaminated through spillage shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Soil that is required to be removed shall be replaced by similar soil approved by the Contracting Officer.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01140 – PHASING

PHASING 01140-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


1. Coordination. 2. Barriers. 3. Temporary Utilities. 4. Notifications. 5. Schedule revisions.


A. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

B. Section 01010 –Summary of Work.

C. Section 01045 – Cutting & Patching.

D. Section 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels.

E. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.

F. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

G. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

H. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

I. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

J. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.


A. Construction phasing shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress.

B. In preparing construction phasing system, scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Construction shall be phased and coordinated with the Contracting Officer in order to keep to a minimum, any disruption of, or interference with, the operation of the existing retail facility.

1. Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative within 15 days of notice to proceed if any problems or conflicts concerning indicated construction phasing are evident.

2. The Exchange and DeCA facitities will be in operation, throughout this contract.

a. Contractor shall submit Contractor prepared Construction Progress Schedule in accordance with Section 01320.

b. Submittal shall illustrate a detailed schedule of work utilizing the priority and sequence of work shown on the Construction Phasing Plan.

3. The Contractor shall keep the Contracting Officer and designated representative advised of any anticipated changes in the work schedule in sufficient time to permit adjustment of store operations, without adversely affecting the ability of the Exchange to function as required.

B. Phasing as shown on the drawings is the required sequence.

PHASING 01140-2

1. The Contractor must submit the schedule, for review, to the Contracting Officer within 15 days after execution of a contract.

2. Items specified herein are complementary to work items shown on the drawings schedule.

C. Beneficial occupancy inspection of finishes only will be made at the end of each work item to allow early access for fixture installations.

D. All phases shall be included in the contract performance period.

1.5 BARRIERS

A. Building areas adjacent to areas to be renovated will not be vacated by the Express.

B. Temporary barriers shall be erected by the Contractor as work progresses as specified in Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

C. Temporary Barriers shall be construction generally in the locations and type indicated as required.

1. Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barriers shall be installed from floor to ceiling, or from floor to underside of roof deck, to seal operational portions of the retail facility from areas of construction

2. Security Barriers shall be installed similarly and secured up to the bottom of roof deck without puncturing deck or roofing materials and shall be weather-tight where separating interior and exterior spaces.

3. Temporary Opaque and Security barriers exposed to customer view shall be painted with two coats of color as indicated or required by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain temporary or permanent power, water and HVAC systems in areas under construction and areas occupied by the Express.

B. Provide all isolation valves and temporary ductwork used to keep system on line in occupied areas for mechanical systems at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:

1. Air-handling units. 2. Supply piping. 3. Water lines. 4. Sprinkler system and other similar items.

C. Provide all temporary modifications required to existing electrical systems to maintain these systems in occupied areas at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:

1. Power. 2. Lighting. 3. Communication. 4. Data. 5. Fire Alarm and other special electrical systems.

D. Permanently reroute sanitary sewer lines in areas where lines are affected by construction in order to maintain sanitary facilities in operational condition prior to demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END 01140.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01210 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01210-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Preparation of required documents.

B. Submittal procedures

C. Review procedures.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01220 – AAFES Progress Meetings. 3. Section 01230 – Progress Payments. 4. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Contractor shall submit Schedule of Values (CSV) to Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review within (15) days after notification of award of Contract.

B. Contractor, upon request by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, shall support any values given with data that will substantiate value correctness.

C. Contractor shall use approved CSV as a basis of periodical progress application for payment.

1.4 FORM OF SUBMITTAL

A. CSV Submittal format:

1. Typewritten, on Application and Certificate for Payment (AIA Form G-702) and Continuation Sheet for G-702 (AIA Form G-703) available from the AIA Bookstore, 911 Washington Avenue - #225, St. Louis, Missouri 6310, (314) 231-4252.

2. Contractor’s form, similar to the AIA Forms specified above, may be substituted as long as all information is formatted identically to AIA format.

B. Contractor shall use specification index as a basis of example and format for listing and itemizing costs of work.

1.5 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed $10,000.00 wherever possible.

a. Break large items of work into smaller items, groups or phases to achieve specified amounts.

b. Individual items of equipment may be itemized in lump sum amounts for each piece of equipment.

c. Itemize demolition into separate line item or items. d. Labor and materials shall be separate line items if Contractor intends to request

payment for stored materials. e. List all subcontractors and supplier contracts that exceed $1,000.00.

2. Format to indicate separate line items for:

a. Overhead and profit.

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01210-2

b. Bonds. c. Insurance. d. General Requirements and mobilization. e. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose

subcontract exceeds $1,000.00. f. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

B. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

C. Contractor shall prepare CSV in sequential order of accepted construction practice.

1.6 REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL

A. If required after review by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, revise and resubmit Schedule of Values in accordance with initial submittal requirements.

B. Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer will approve final submittal.

C. Architect-Engineer will distribute approved copies to AAFES and Contractor for use in preparing Pay Requests.

END 01210.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01220 – PROGRESS MEETINGS

PROGRESS MEETINGS 01220-1

1 GENERAL


A. Progress Meeting crteria.


A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.

B. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

C. Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.

D. Section 01230 – Progress Payments.

E. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The Contracting Officer or designated representative shall schedule and preside at monthly progress meetings.

B. The Contracting Officer or designated representative shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants.

C. Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice.

D. Attendance Required:

1. Tyndall AFB representatives. 2. Contractor's project manager. 3. Contractor's superintendent. 4. Major sub-contractors and suppliers. 5. Tyndall AFB Environmental Division representative.

E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Coordination of projected progress. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work.

PROGRESS MEETINGS 01220-2

F. Meeting Minutes: Designated representative shall record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the participants and Contracting Officer within five (5) business days of the meeting.



END 01220.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01230 – PROGRESS PAYMENTS

PROGRESS PAYMENTS 01230-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 COST BREAKDOWN

A. After the Notice to Proceed is issued, the Contractor shall be required to provide a breakdown of work as indicated in Section 01210, Schedule of Values.

B. Each item of work must also indicate the subcontractor who will perform this work.

1.2 PREPARATION OF PAY REQUEST

A. Upon execution of the Notice to Proceed and prior to scheduling the first Progress/Pay Meeting the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Schedule of Values (CSV) to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review and approval in accord with requirements of Section 01210.

B. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed specified maximum amount indicated.

2. Format to indicate separate line items for overhead and profit, bonds, insurance, general requirements and mobilization as described.

a. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose subcontract exceeds limits set forth.

b. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

C. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS

A. Format and Data Required:

1. Submit pencil copy applications to Architect-Engineer for review at least 4-days in advance of scheduled Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Applications shall be itemized on forms and in format required for CSV with values broken down as specified above.

B. Preparation of Pencil Copy Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. Application form:

a. Fill in required information, including that for change orders executed prior to date of submittal of application.

b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets.

c. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of contracting firm.

2. Continuation sheets:

a. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item.


b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored.

1.) Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values.

c. List each change order executed prior to date of submission at end of continuation sheets.

1.) List by change order number and description the same as for an original component item of work.

3. Architect-Engineer will use pencil copy of application for payment as a basis for evaluating completed work upon arrival to Site for monthly scheduled Progress/Pay Meetings.

a. Architect-Engineer will review progress of work with Contractor’s on-site Superintendent and make any changes in amounts requested.

b. The Architect-Engineer will present reviewed and initialed pencil copy of pay request to Contractor at Progress/Pay Meeting. for formal preparation and presentation to Contracting Officer for payment.

C. Preparation of Formal Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. The Contractor shall prepare formal typewritten copy of application for payment, edited as determined and agreed to on initialed pencil copy at the Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Submit one (1) signed/notarized copy to Architect-Engineer via e-mail for formal approval, signature and presentation to the Contracting Officer.

a. Architect-Engineer will forward approved, signed application to Contracting Officer via e-mail within two (2) days of receipt from Contractor.

b. Upon acceptance of e-mailed application, payment to Contractor will be processed subject to General Provisions of the Contract.

3. Submit one (1) additional hard copy to Architect-Engineer for formal approval and transmittal to Contracting Officer.

a. Attach current Construction Photos per requirements of Section 01010. b. Attach revised Progress Schedule per requirements of Section 01310. c. Attach Summary Report of progress since last request for payment and

anticipated progress until next request for payment.

D. Each request for payment shall be accompanied by the certification contained in Exhibit A, Clause 45b(2)(b) with Invoice number included.

E. If requested by Contracting Officer, Contractor shall submit receipts or other vouchers showing his payments for material and labor, including payments to subcontractors.

1.4 STORED MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT NOT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK

A. Progress Payments will be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work provided that:

1. Such materials and equipment have been delivered to and suitably stored at site or some other location approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.

a. Provide list of stored materials for which payment is being requested for Contracting Officer and designated representative.


b. Store in like lots for ease of inventory by Contracting Officer or designated representative

2. All materials stored off-site shall be marked or tagged with identification of project to which they are assigned and shall be accessible for inspection.

3. Contractor submits evidence of title to such materials and equipment in the form of detailed receipts to Contracting Officer.

4. Care and custody of such materials and equipment and all costs incurred for movement and storage shall be responsibility of Contractor.

B. Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Insurance showing AAFES, DeCA and Tyndall AFB as an additional insured and showing amount of insurance coverage for the stored items or suitable proof that material and equipment are stored in a Bonded Warehouse.

C. Payment for stored materials will be subject to all conditions and approval of Contracting Officer.

1.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD

A. The Contracting Officer may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect Tyndall AFB from loss on account of:

1. Defective work not remedied. 2. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. 3. Failure of the GC to make payments properly to subcontractors or for materials

or labor. 4. A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then

unpaid. 5. Damage to another Contractor or to some third party. 6. Failure to maintain milestones in accordance with the approved construction

progress schedule 01320, Construction Progress Schedules. 7. Failure to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials.

END 01230.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01310 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01310-1

1 GENERAL


A. Request For Information (RFI’s).

B. Pre-construction Meeting.

C. Pre-installation Conferences.

D. Other Coordination Meetings applicable to work at any given time.

1.2 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. RFI Forms: Contractor shall provide software-generated executable form acceptable to Contracting Officer.

B. Contracting Officer Action: Allow seven working days for Contracting Officer’s response for each RFI.

C. RFI Log:

1. Maintain a tabular log of RFIs. 2. Submit log weekly.

1.3 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Contractor provide Project Management Application Website for project communication and documentation.

1. Provide up to ten (10) Website user licenses for use of Tyndall AFB Project Manager, Tyndall AFB Contracting Officer and Contractor.

2. Provide software instruction and training for Website users.

B. Project Website software package:

1. Meridian Systems, Prolog. 2. Other Construction Management software systems acceptable to Contracting

Officer or designated representative.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Contracting Officer will schedule and preside at Pre-construction meeting.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contracting Officer, Project Manager and other Tyndall AFB representatives. 2. Local and regional AAFES and DeCA representatives. 3. Contractor 4. Major Sub-contractors

C. Agenda:

1. Execution of Notice to Proceed. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of sub-contractors.


4. Review of checklist of contract requirements. 5. Discussion of Contractor’s Schedule of Values. 6. Discussion of Construction Schedule. 7. Discussion of critical sequencing. 8. Designation of responsible personnel. 9. Processing of field decisions and change orders. 10. Submission of applications for payment. 11. Submittal of shop drawings. 12. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 13. Fire, safety and spill procedures. 14. Security procedures. 15. Accident prevention and reports. 16. Housekeeping procedures. 17. Use of premises

a. Office and storage locations. b. Personnel parking.

18. Major equipment deliveries. 19. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

D. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by Tyndall AFB or designated representative and distributed to AAFES, DeCA, Contractor, and applicable Tyndall AFB personnel.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.

B. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a Pre-installation conference at Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.

a. Advise Contracting Officer and designated representative of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions.


n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

a. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

C. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, conduct Project Coordination Meetings to resolve routine issues.

END 01310.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01320 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01320-1

1 GENERAL


A. Format.

B. Content.

C. Revisions to schedules.

D. Submittals.





D. Section 01150 – Progress Payments.

E. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

F. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

1.3 SCOPE

A. Exhibit "A" - General Provisions of the Contract for Construction, Article entitled: "Schedule and Progress"

B. The Contractor prepared scheduling progress chart system shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress and scheduling.

1.4 GENERAL

A. The scheduling progress chart system shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall consist of a Critical Path bar chart as described in this section.

B. In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be developed in accordance with construction phasing shown on the construction drawings where applicable.

C. The requirement for the system is included to assure adequate planning and execution of the work and to assist the Contracting Officer in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and evaluating progress of the work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a preliminary scheduling progress chart to the Contracting Officer or designated representative defining the Contractor's proposed operations for the first sixty (60) of the contract within ten (10) days after date of Notice to Proceed.


1. Indicate the Contractor's general approach for the balance of the project. 2. Include the cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed

before submission and approval of the complete progress schedule.

B. Upon approval of the preliminary scheduling progress chart by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, and within thirty (30) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the complete progress chart with copy to the Architect-Engineer.

C. Contractor shall also submit a narrative report with the updated bar chart, including a description of problem areas (current and anticipated) delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.

D. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires plus four (4) copies that will be retained by Contracting Officer and one (1) copy to be retained by the Architect-Engineer.

1.6 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES

A. Submit revised progress chart system with each monthly Application for Payment.

1. Copy of the complete bar chart with the current activity progress clearly indicated. 2. Current cost of each activity completed and each partially completed shall be

updated and included.

B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and revised projected completion date of each activity.

C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other identifiable changes that could affect the overall schedule.

D. Provide revised narrative report with each submittal describing work accomplished during the previous period, the work scheduled for the next period, anticipated problem areas and delays and impact on the Schedule.

E. Report corrective action taken or proposed.

1.7 PROGRESS CHART SYSTEM

A. The system consists of keeping a record of the time allotted for each activity and the actual progress of the activity.

B. Activities shall be listed vertically and shall include the units of work required for the project.

1. All activities of AAFES, DeCA or Tyndall AFB, which affect progress and Contract required dates for completion shall be shown.

2. Include activities for AAFES FURNISHED/AAFES INSTALLED and AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS.

C. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Contracting Officer's approval.


1.8 FORMAT

A. Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first workday of each week.

1. A scale of time, from date of the beginning of the contract work to the date of completion of the contract work, shall be indicated horizontally on the chart.

2. The units of time indicated shall be days.

3. Indicate time allotted for each major activity, the actual progress of the activity and the time spent to date or to the finish of the activity.

B. The format shall be such to enable the Contracting Officer or designated representative to evaluate the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and to determine if the actual construction is on schedule.

1.9 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification section number.

C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item and total percentage of Work completed as of the first day of each month.

D. Indicate delivery dates for AAFES furnished products.

1.10 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.



END 01320.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01331 – WEATHER TABLE

WEATHER TABLE 01331-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 INFORMATION AND DATA

A. Information and data furnished or referred to in the weather table is furnished for the Contractor's information.

B. The General Contractor is responsible for submitting a written request for time extension under this specification Section.

1. The General Contractor request shall include backup justification for each written request for time extension.

2. Any time extension granted under this specification Section shall be at no cost to Tyndall AFB.

1.2 CONTRACT TIME LIMITS

A. The contract time limits include weather conditions that are shown in the table listed herein.

1.3 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER

A. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather affecting exterior work in accordance with the Contract.

B. The following listing defines the monthly anticipated adverse weather for the contract period and is based on NOAA data for the geographic location of the project.

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER CALENDAR DAYS

Tyndall Air Force Base – Florida (Bay County)

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC

01 01 02 03 03 03 03 04 01 02 02 03

C. This listing of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line monthly weather

time evaluations.

1. Throughout the contract each month, actual adverse weather days will be recorded on a calendar basis (including weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather in this listing.

a. The term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather.

b. The number of actual adverse weather days affecting exterior work shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month.

2. Adverse weather days must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the contractor's workday and delay work critical to the timely completion of the project.

3. If the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of days anticipated in the above listing, then the Contracting Officer will determine the time extension for the Contractor.

WEATHER TABLE 01331-2

4. The Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days and issue a modification in accordance with the contract.



END 01331.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01340 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS 01340-1

1 GENERAL


A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Shop Drawings.

D. Samples.

E. Product Data.

F. Certificates.


A. Section 01010 – Summary of Work.

B. Section 01060 – Safety Policies & Procedures.


D. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.

E. Section 01420 – Environmental Protection.

F. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

G. Technical Sections of the Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with formatted Form as provided by Tyndall AFB or equivalent Contractor generated transmittal form in same format.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal form.

C. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate.

E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and in accordance with the List of Required Submittals in this section.


1. Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer. 2. Coordinate submission of related items.

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

1. Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for completing the work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Review/approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Review by Tyndall AFB BCE does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full compliance with the Contract Documents.

H. Prior to approval of the material/product submitted:

1. Contractor shall include with the submittal a written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos.

2. This certificate is mandatory before review will be made and/or Contracting Officer approval issued.

I. Provide space for Contractor and Tyndall AFB review stamps.

J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate.

L. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary Scheduling Progress Chart within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Submit complete (final) Scheduling Progress Chart within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Proceed.

C. Submit monthly revisions of Scheduling Progress Chart.

D. Submit monthly revised narrative reports.

E. Refer to Section 01320 - Construction Progress Schedules, for submittal information.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings For Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer or designated representative for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer. 3. Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11". 4. After review, distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures article

above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

B. Shop Drawings For Project Close-out:


1. Submitted for Tyndall AFB use after project completion. 2. Retain two (2) reviewed/approved sets of each Shop Drawing and Product

Data sheet for submittal to Contracting Officer at Project Close-out as part of O & M Manuals per Section 01700.

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service and for functional equipment and appliances.

1. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two for O & M Manuals, plus two (three on civil, structural, mechanical, and electrical submittals) copies that will be retained by Architect-Engineer.

1.6 SAMPLES

A. Samples For Review:

1. Submitted to Tyndall AFB for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

B. Samples For Information:

1. Submit for the Tyndall AFB review and Contracting Officer's knowledge as project administrator.

C. Samples For Selection:

1. Submitted to Tyndall AFB for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,

or in custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and patterns for Tyndall AFB selection and Contracting Officer's approval.

3. After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices.

E. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

F. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

G. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be retained by Contracting Officer.

H. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections.

I. Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings.

1.7 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data.

B. Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the respective shop drawings or samples.


1.8 CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Contracting Officer, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

C. Submit supporting reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as appropriate.

D. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.9 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. General Construction:

1. Section 01045, Cutting & Patching:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation.

2. Section 01051, Grades, Lines & Levels:

a. Schedules. b. Staging and Trailer Location Plan.

3. Section 01060, Safety Policies & Procedures:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation. c. Hazard, Health/Safety, Response Plans.

4. Section 01320, Construction Progress Schedules:

a. Preliminary Schedule. b. Complete Schedule. c. Revised Schedules. d. Revised Narrative Reports.

5. Section 01340, Submittals:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

6. Section 01420, Environmental Protection:

a. Environmental Protection Plan.

7. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Documentation.

8. Section 01620, Storage & Protection:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation.


9. Section 01700, Project Closeout:

a. Project Record Documents. b. Operation & Maintenance Manuals. c. Approved Shop Drawings, Bound. d. Training Documentation. e. Warranties. f. End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable. g. DD Form 1354 Quantities and Cost Information. h. Other Closeout Submittals.

10. Section 01710, Cleaning:

a. Instructions. b. Product Data.

11. Section 01720, Project Record Documents:

a. As-built Drawings. b. As-built Specifications.

12. Section 02070, Selective Demolition:

a. Schedules.

13. Section 02300, Earthwork:

a. Samples. b. Test Reports. c. Documentation.

14. Section 02910, Sod Lawns:

a. Product Data. b. Turf Certification. c. Installer Qualifications. d. Product Certificates. e. Material Test Reports

15. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete:

a. Design Mix. b. Test Reports. c. Certifications. d. Shop Drawings. e. Product Data.

16. Section 04850, Natural Thin Veneer Stone:

a. Certifications. b. Test Reports. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

17. Section 05400, Cold-Formed Metal Framing:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.


18. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data.

19. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.

20. Section 06300, Fire Retardent Wood Treatment:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.

21. Section 07240, Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

22. Section 07536, Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only):

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Documentation.

23. Section 07540, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO):

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Documentation.

24. Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

25. Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers:

a. Product Data. b. Samples. c. Documentation.

26. Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems:

a. Certifications. b. Instructions. c. Product Data.


27. Section 09900, Painting:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

28. Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

B. Electrical Construction:

1. Section 16060, Electrical Demolition for Remodeling:

a. Schedules.

2. Section 16111, Conduit:

a. Product Data.

3. Section 16123, Building Wire and Cable:

a. Product Data. b. Manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Section 16130, Boxes:

a. Product Data.

5. Section 16141, Wiring Devices:

a. Product Data.

6. Section 16170, Grounding and Bonding:

a. Product Data. b. Manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Section 16190, Supporting Devices:

a. Product Data. a. Manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Section 16195, Electrical Identification:

a. Product Data.

9. Section 16510, Luminaires:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer’s instructions.

10. Section 16950, Testing:

a. Test results.



END 01340.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL

QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of subcontractor(s) to ensure conformation to applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials, workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance.

1. Tests of materials and/or special inspections will be made, when required by these specifications, by applicable law, rules and regulations in accordance with respective Sections.

2. Where required by individual specification Sections, the Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency, licensed in the State of Florida, to perform specific services and testing.

a. Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the Contractor include tests during the manufacturing and fabrication processes that are not performed in the field, but required to assure quality control including, but not limited to:

1.) Ready-mix plant testing. 2.) Shop welding.

b. Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the Contractor include field tests during construction to assure quality control including, but not limited to:

1.) Provision of a Qualified Professional, licensed in the State of Florida, to provide initial installation supervision and quality control inspections of environmental controls.

2.) Electrical testing. 3.) Incidental testing required by the Installation. 4.) Installation Fire Department tests.

B. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all services and testing indicated above and those specified that are not specifically indicated to be provided by AAFES, DeCA or Tyndall AFB.

C. Testing agencies and test to be performed shall be approved by AAFES, DeCA and Tyndall AFB.

D. If a material is not required to be field tested, the Contracting Officer shall require the supplier to furnish a certificate bearing legal signature of said supplier with each delivery of such material stating that such material complies with specification requirements.

E. If any work or materials requiring tests and inspections is executed, enclosed or covered before tests are made, or test reports distributed, whether the responsibility of the Contractor or Tyndall AFB:

1. Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover such part of this work or material and keep it uncovered until such tests and inspections have been made and test reports distributed.


2. If work or material so tested and inspected shall be found not to conform to the requirements of the Construction Documents, it shall be deemed and construed to be defective materials or faulty workmanship and the Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace work or material removed and repair all work disturbed thereby.

F. The Contractor's (') testing agency(ies) shall report results of all tests in writing via e-mail transmittal simultaneously to the following:

1. Contracting Officer 3 copies 2. Designated Representative 1 copy 3. Site Inspector 1 copy 4. Contractor 1 copy

G. Reports shall state that tests were made under responsible charge of a Testing Engineer, holding a license to operate in the state where the project is being constructed, and that material or materials were tested in accordance with provisions of these specifications, and that material and/or materials tested, passed or failed to pass such requirements.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Make notifications to testing agencies and coordinate services with Construction Schedule, whether provided by Contractor or AAFES.

1. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

2. Make arrangements with testing agency for onsite inspection services in conjunction with Construction Schedule.

3. All costs for ill-timed scheduling of testing agency on-site services shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Cooperate with the Contracting Officer or designated representative and laboratory personnel and provide access to work and to manufacturer’s operations.

1. Provide samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. 2. Furnish casual labor and facilities required to provide access to work to be tested:

a. To obtain and handle samples at the site. b. To facilitate inspections and tests. c. For laboratory’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.

C. The use of Contractor’s independent testing services shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the plans and specifications.

D. Contractor shall coordinate with AAFES, DeCA, Tyndall AFB and his own testing laboratories so that the work will be inspected and tested according to contract requirements.

1. This coordination includes notification of when tests should be taken, easy access to the work, and general cooperation in every way to insure proper control of the work.

E. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall submit signed certificates stating tests for this work were made in accordance with provisions of these specifications and, further, all such tests and reports made were reported as required.

1. These certificates shall list all tests and dates when work was completed.


1.3 CONTRACTOR’S TESTING RESPONSIBILITY

A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Agency to perform specified quality control testing during construction indicated in the following Sections:

1. Earthwork: Section 02300. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03300. 3. Structural Cold-formed Metal Framing: Section 05400 (Field Q/C, Connections &

Welding). 4. Structural Metal Fabrications: Section 05500 (Field Q/C, Connections & Welding. 5. Warranted Modified Bitumen Roofing/Flashing Patches: Section 07536 (As

required by manufacturer to maintain current warranty).

B. In addition, Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of specialized manufacturer’s representatives to observe procedure, inspect and certify that systems below have been installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and that specified warranties will be issued covering repair and/or replacement of systems in the event of failure of work within warranty period:

1. Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Section 07240. 2. Warranted Modified Bitumen Roofing System: Section 07536. 3. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO): Section 07540.

C. Employment of Independent Testing Agency or manufacturer’s representatives in no way relieves Contractor of his responsibilities to deliver Project in full compliance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services.

C. Related requirements and tests specified in Division 2 through 16.



END 01400.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01410 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410-1

1 GENERAL

A. Selection and payment.

B. Laboratory/Agency responsibilities.

C. Laboratory/Agency reports.

D. Limits on testing authority.

E. Contractor responsibilities.

F. Schedule of tests.


A. Section 02300 – Earthwork.

B. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing (Field Q/C & Connections).

D. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications (Field Q/C, Connections & Welding).

1.3 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory to perform testing as specified in the individual Sections listed in Article 1.2 above.

B. Employment of testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. In addition, Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of specialized manufacturer’s representatives to observe procedure, inspect and certify that systems below have been installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and that specified warranties will be issued covering repair and/or replacement of systems in the event of failure:

1. Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Section 07240. 2. Warranted Modified Bitumen Roofing System: Section 07536. 3. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing System (TPO): Section 07540.

1.4 LABORATORY/AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

B. Provide qualified personnel at site.

C. Cooperate with Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor in performance of services.

D. Perform specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.

E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Promptly notify Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products.


G. Perform additional tests required by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

H. Submit e-mail or server based written test reports within 3-days after test is performed to the following parties:

1. Contracting Officer. 2. Site Inspector. 3. Contractor. 4. Architect. 5. Applicable Consulting Engineer.

I. Each report shall include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing Laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results.

J. Upon completion of the project, the testing agency shall prepare a certificate, certified in the presence of a Notary Public, stating testing for this work was conducted in accordance with the provisions of these specifications, and further, all tests and reports were provided for this job were reported as required.

1.5 LIMITS ON TESTING AUTHORITY

A. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.


A. Deliver to agency or laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. Notify Contracting Officer, designated representative and field testing agency laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to time for operations requiring testing services.

C. Coordinate work and cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.

D. Provide incidental labor and facilities:


1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested. 3. To facilitate tests. 4. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

E. Employ services of an independent testing laboratory, licensed in the State of Florida, and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements:

1. For Contractor's convenience. 2. When initial tests indicate work does not comply with contract documents, provide

and pay for additional testing. 3. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer or designated representative,

additional tests or inspections are required because of the manner in which the Contractor executes his work, provide and pay for additional testing.

4. Examples of such tests and inspections are:

a. Tests of materials substituted for previously approved or specified materials. b. Retests made necessary by failure of materials to comply the requirements of

the specifications. c. Load tests made necessary because portions of the structure do not meet

specifications or drawings requirements.

5. Testing specified in Section 01400, Quality Control and other Sections of the Project Manual that are identified to be provided by the Contractor.

1.7 SCHEDULE OF TESTS

A. Test required and standards for testing are specified in the individual specification Sections .

B. Inspection, sampling and testing as paid for by AAFES is required for the following individual components or systems of Work:

1. Supervision and inspection of Asbestos Abatement work by Asbestos Project Manager in accord with specification Section 02083.

2. Soils and base course compaction control in accord with specification Section 02300; ASTM D-1557, Modified Proctor Test.

3. Asphalt concrete pavement in accord with specification Section 02740; core sampling to determine pavement depth variances.

4. Concrete paving in accord with Specification Section 02750 and subject to provisions set forth below for Concrete Work.

5. Concrete Work, Section 03300.

a. Testing and evaluation of concrete strength shall conform to latest edition of American Concrete Institute Standard 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".

b. Tests for compressive strength of concrete cylinders:

1.) One composite sample shall be obtained for each day’s pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cubic yards but less than 25 cubic yards.

2.) One additional composite test shall be taken for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof over the initial 25 cubic yards.

3.) Each test shall be comprised of 4 cylinders cured under exact conditions as the related concrete pour for a minimum of 24-hours before being removed from the site.

6. Structural Steel field testing, visual bolt tensioning, field welding, fastening and other structural performance testing as specified in Sections 05120 and 05310.


7. Testing and balancing of heating and ventilation equipment is specified in Section 15990.

C. Testing and/or certification paid for by the Contractor is required for the following individual components or systems of Work:

1. Supervision and quality control inspection of environmental controls. 2. Initial testing of borrow site material to determine suitability for compliance with

Specifications for use as fill material. 3. Personnel air monitoring in accord with specification Section 02083. 4. Certification of termiticide application in accord with specification Section 02282. 5. Ready-mix plant testing or certification as specified in Sections 02750 and 03300. 6. Structural steel fabricator shop quality control procedures and shop welds as

specified in Section 05120. 7. Special systems testing as specified in Division 13. 8. Pipe pressure testing as specified in Division 15. 9. Testing of electrical components and systems as specified in Division 16. 10. Other utility services testing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.



END 01410.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01420 – ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 01420-1

1 GENERAL


A. Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and performing all work required for the prevention of environmental degradation during and as a result of construction operations under this contract.

B. These requirements are in addition to any environmental protection requirements elsewhere in these specifications.

C. For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site, which adversely affect:

1. Human health or welfare. 2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life. 3. Other species of importance to humans. 4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes.

D. The control of environmental pollution by the Contractor requires consideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management and management of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants.

E. This section also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.

F. Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the various sections of Division 2.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS

A. Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.

B. All environmental rules applying to Contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the government facility.

C. Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection and pollution control and abatement.

D. Contractor has the duty to determine for himself where such laws and regulations apply.

E. These regulations include but are not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 7. Coastal Zone Management Act.


8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Archeological Resources Protection Act. 14. Pollution Prevention Act. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

F. Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officer in delineating applicable environmental laws and regulations, Contractor has an independent responsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.

1.3 FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against AAFES or the installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental laws or regulation resulting from acts or omissions of the Contractor or its employees, subcontractors, or agents.

B. This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may be assessed against the Contractor for the same conduct.

C. Contractor may either reimburse these fines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or with the consent of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties directly to the regulatory agency or agencies concerned.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES

A. Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify AAFES (which includes the Army, Air Force, or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages of any kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the Contractor, Contractor’s employees or agents or subcontractors.

B. “Damages” includes but are not limited to personal injury, property damage (including diminution of value) or death, environmental restoration and response costs, natural resource damages, expert witness and attorney’s fees, and reimbursement of any and all expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor’s failure to identify or obtain permits for itself or AAFES.

1.5 CONTACTS WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALS

A. Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office of the content of all contacts with Federal, State, or local environmental regulators, before, during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the performance of this contract.


2 PERMITS

2.1 PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING AAFES CONTRACTS

A. For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in Contractor’s name and at no additional expense to Tyndall AFB, all permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work required by this contract under applicable environmental laws and regulations.

B. “Applicable environmental laws and regulations” includes but is not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 7. Coastal Zone Management Act. 8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Pollution Prevention Act. 14. State, County, and Local laws and regulations on the same subjects. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

2.2 PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION, RENOVATION, DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local, permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable environmental laws and regulations as defined in (A.) above.

B. Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft all applicable permit applications, coordination, notices, or other required filings, together with all supporting data to the Contracting Officer for review.

C. Permit applications or notifications or other documents that must be submitted by AAFES will be submitted by AAFES will be reviewed by CE for BCE signature, and any documents that must be submitted by the Contractor will be returned after review to the Contractor for submission.

D. No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceed before the Contractor has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.


3 MATERIALS

3.1 RECYCLED MATERIALS

A. Materials used in this contract shall be, to the greatest extent practicable and consistent with financial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable.

B. Where construction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this alternative will be considered.

3.2 ASBESTOS

A. Asbestos will not be used or included in this project.

3.3 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL’S (PCBS)

A. PCBs will not be used or included in this project.

3.4 LEAD-BASED PAINT

A. Lead-based paint will not be used or included in this project.

3.5 OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. “Class I substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

B. “Class II substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to hydorchlorofluorocarbons.

C. As required by 42 USC 7671j(b), c, and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, or containers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, as follows:

“WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _________*_________, (a) substance(s) which harm(s) public health and the environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere.”

(*The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s).)

D. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of the Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling Emission Reduction Program and 7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

3.6 PESTICIDES

A. Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without the specific written prior approval of the Contracting Officer.


4 EXECUTION

4.1 GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITES

A. Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation of fugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction site and any temporary roads that may be used for access to it.

1. Water sprinkling may be used to control dust.

B. Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that no pollutants of any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surface waters on or connected to the site.

4.2 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes or other harmful materials or pollutants.

2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and comply with all applicable Federal, State, Regional, Municipal, and other regulations.

B. Spillage:

1. The Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage from entering public waters.

2. In the event of a spill, the Contractor must make all required notifications to Federal, State or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officer immediately.

C. Washing and Curing Water:

1. Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation, and concrete lift clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the storm drainage system.

4.3 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES

A. General:

1. It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear to the natural and not detract from the appearance of the project.

2. The Contractor shall limit his construction activities to areas defined by the Drawings or Specifications.

B. Prevention of Landscape Defacement:

1. Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, the Contractor shall not deface, remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without specific written authority.

2. Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from either excavation or filling within the root zone.

3. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer.


4. The Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use.

C. Restoration of Landscape Damage:

1. Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the Contractor’s equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original condition at the Contractor’s expense.

2. The Contracting Officer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of under requirements for clearing and grubbing (Section 02102).

3. All scars made on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall be coated immediately with an approved tree wound dressing.

4. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced landscape personnel.

5. Tree trimming with axes shall not be permitted. 6. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are

subsequently damaged by the Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown tree of the same species.

4.4 CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONS

A. Contractor’s actions shall conform to all Federal, State, and local requirements for the control of air emissions during work under this contract.

B. Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washed to remove all practicable amounts of dust or other material that may become airborne.

C. Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have the lowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating condition for the reduction of air emissions.

D. Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustion engines is feasible, electric motors will be used during construction.

5 WASTE DISPOSAL

5.1 POLLUTION PREVENTION & WASTE DISPOSAL

A. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.

B. Recycling shall be implemented at every practicable stage of the project.

5.2 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Pollution Prevention:

1. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work practices that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.

B. Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal.

1. Work done under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.


2. According to rules and procedures of the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generator identification number under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to be responsible for wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, or transported from the facility.

3. Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, use materials, processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste.

4. Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan for all hazardous wastes generated on the site.

5. Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes, Contractor will coordinate planned activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous waste with the Contracting Officer.

6. Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, through the Contracting Officer, to installation environmental office.

a. Contractor shall follow this plan after approval by the Contracting Officer.

7. Under no circumstances will Contractor bring onto the site hazardous waste that has been generated elsewhere.

8. All hazardous waste will be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

C. Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes.

1. All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result of this contract must be disposed of properly, in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

2. Materials will be recycled whenever practicable. 3. Prior to creation of such wastes, the Contractor shall submit to the installation

environmental management function, through the Contracting Officer, a plan for disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the types of waste to be created, how they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the installation and Contracting Officer.

4. Such wastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.

D. Construction Debris.

1. Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on the installation or as designated by the installation authorities.

2. If a location on the installation is not available, other sections in this contract may require the Contactor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of the Contractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not covered by this paragraph.)

3. Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with MacDill AFB and all applicable Federal, State and local rules.

a. Such debris must be free of all contamination, including but not limited to, lead paint, asbestos, and insecticides.

4. Prior to removal of any construction debris, that debris must be certified by the installation to be free of contamination and of no value to the United States, and this certification must be provided to the Contracting Officer.

a. To expedite work, this may be accomplished by e-mail or other suitable electronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to the Contracting Officer.


b. No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessary information is provided and the document is signed by an authorized installation representative.

c. However, an example is provided at page 01420-9 and this form may be used.

5. All construction debris removed from the installation must be covered by a certification.

6. The Contractor must arrange with the installation POC whether all debris will be covered by one certification or if several certifications will be required.

E. Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans:

1. Contractor may, at Contractor’s option, submit for approval as specified above one consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.

F. Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media:

1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution.

a. However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation, where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily completely known.

b. The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or other materials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the protection of the Installation, AAFES, DeCA and the Contractor.

2. Notwithstanding any other clause in this contract, including but not limited to all standard site work general provisions (02010-02900); no media by-product resulting from site preparation, construction or excavation shall be moved off the post, base, or installation where the construction is occurring.

a. If the construction is off the post, base or installation, no media by-product shall be moved off the construction site.

3. The Contractor shall:

a. Leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosion control or; b. Haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has been

designated either in this contract or in writing by the Contracting Officer; and c. If unforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated,

the Contractor shall advise the Contracting Officer and shall not remove media from the site without written authorization from the Contracting Officer.

4. Definitions.

a. Media – Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site. b. The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same

meanings and usage here as they commonly do in CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCA, CAA, TSCA, and SDWA respectively.


INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS TO BE REMOVED FROM AAFES PROJECT SITE As representative of ___________________________ (insert name of installation), I am authorized to certify, and hereby do so certify, that the construction debris to be removed from the AAFES project site at ______________________ ____________________________________________ (describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, X installation) has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of all contamination, including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides. CERTIFICATION: Signed: ______________________________________________ Date: ____________________ Printed Name, Rank or Grade, and Duty Title: ___________________________________________ ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER


6 UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONS

6.1 CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER

A. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, unexpected conditions can always arise.

B. Contractor or subcontractor personnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected to be contaminated, either because of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction debris, or other suspicious conditions.

C. Should this occur, Contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protect workers, the site, and other personnel.

6.2 UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS

A. Should Contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this contract find unexpected historic or archeological remains, such as bones, arrow points, pottery remnants, foundations, or other evidence of previous uses of the site, Contractor will cease further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer and installation environmental office.

END 01420.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS

TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS 01500-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls, including construction aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of the work:

1. Chutes. 2. Cranes. 3. Hoists. 4. Platforms. 5. Railings. 6. Ramps. 7. Runways. 8. Stairs.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary barriers and enclosures to separate phased construction areas and areas occupied for use by AAFES and DeCA.

C. Contractor shall provide all other construction aids required to complete work:

1. Temporary devices and equipment. 2. Temporary protection coverings.

D. Contractor shall provide Site security program at mobilization:

1. Enforce site security program. 2. Implement installation rules and regulations for all work at Tyndall AFB. 3. Enforce supplemental security program specified in the Section. 4. Coordinate and cooperate with Contracting Officer, AAFES General Manager,

AAFES Store Manager, DeCA Personnel and Tyndall AFB BCE in establishing, maintaining and enforcing security program during construction.

5. Protect work, stored materials and construction equipment from theft and vandalism.

6. Prevent access to construction areas by unauthorized persons. 7. Protect Installation and AAFES property at site from theft, vandalism or damage

from Contractor’s work or employees.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01000 – Requirements of Tyndall AFB. 2. Section 01010 – Project Summary. 3. Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures. 4. Section 01140 – Phasing. 5. Section 01400 – Quality Control. 6. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services. 7. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 8. Section 01590 – Field Offices and Storage Sheds. 9. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.


B. Installed but specified elsewhere:

1. Structural cold-formed metal framing members related to work under this Section are specified in Section 05400, Cold-formed Metal Framing.

2. Wood framing, plywood, fasteners and other wood materials related to work under this Section are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

3. Non-structural cold-formed metal drywall framing members and gypsum drywall are specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

4. Other technical Sections of the specifications as related to work under this Section.

C. Temporary facilities, barriers and controls must comply with NFPA 241, EM-385-1-1 and UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Coordinate and comply with requirements established by Tyndall AFB BCE.

B. Obtain all permits and inspections required.

C. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.

1. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 2. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 3. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 4. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 5. National Electrical Safety Code. 6. Federal and State Requirements.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 15 September 2010 and UFAS to maintain accessible paths of travel and means of egress during construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls Plan for coordination that indicates dust/debris control measures, security measures, proposed locations and proposed time frame of necessity for such items.

1. Submit Plan(s) at a minimum scale of 1/8” = 1’-0”. 2. For each Phase of work indicate:

a. Locations of all temporary partitions. b. Proposed partition types. c. Door locations and door types to be provided. d. Other information to describe means of protecting occupied areas of the

building from dust, debris and personal injury.

3. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of HVAC system on plan.

a. Indicate location of proposed air filtration system, make-up air and air filtration discharge.

b. Other dust control measures.


4. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of building sprinkler system zones and duration of isolation during construction.

5. Schematically indicate waste management plan.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide the following under the Work of this Section:

1. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 6-mil minimum thickness, with flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.

2. Dust Barrier Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by polyethylene sheet manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations.

3. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats of 36” x 60” minimum size at exits from work areas and wherever necessary to control the spread of dust from foot traffic.

4. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool or rock wool with maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.

5. Cold-formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 645, 40 ksi, of profile, size and base metal thickness required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements.

6. Gypsum Board: Gypsum wall board, ASTM C 36, Type “X”, ½” or 5/8” thickness. 7. Doors and Frames: Hollow metal door frames with hollow metal or solid core doors

and hardware as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Material may be new or used.

C. Materials shall be adequate for purposes intended,

D. Materials shall not create unsafe or unsanitary conditions.

E. Materials shall be furnished in compliance with specified codes and standards.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide the following minimum equipment items under work of this Section:

1. Spring-Loaded Poles, Ceiling and Wall Rails and Side Wall Clamps: Dust barrier system for fast setup and breakdown dust barrier systems that consist of spring-loaded support poles that extend from 4’-7” to 12’-0” or 6’-9” to 21’-0” and hold plastic sheet in position as a curtain barrier equal to system manufactured by Zipwall, 37 Broadway, Arlington, MA 02474, (800) 718-2255, (www.zipwall.com).

2. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated with class and extinguishing agent as required by specified Code and the Ft. Sill Fire Department for locations and classes of fire exposure.

3. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter equipped portable units with four stage filtration.

a. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. b. Configure to run continuously.


2.3 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Temporary Walls, Closures, Security Enclosures and Barricades:

1. Provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures required to protect the work in progress from outside elements, dust, interior construction dust and noise, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract.

2. Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the approval of the Contracting Officer, and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period, or as required to provide for the protection as specified.

B. Provide weather protection for materials and allow for effective construction heating and to prevent entry of unauthorized personnel.

C. Maintain site and work areas in secure, enclosed condition at end of each workday.

1. Provide temporary enclosures or barriers of substantial construction. 2. Provide temporary opening protections where areas cannot be closed and secured

at the end of each workday.

2.4 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

A. Contractor coordinate installation of temporary protective coverings with work of various trades.

B. Contractor provide temporary protective coverings over finishes that could be damaged by construction activities.

C. Protective coverings shall be maintained throughout the duration when construction activities require surface protection or until the Contracting Officer authorizes removal.

D. Regularly clean areas and protective coverings as construction activities require in order to prevent damage to new finishes and substrates.

E. Upon completion of work remove temporary protective coverings, clean and repair any damage to new construction surfaces.

2.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION

A. Provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting equipment, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and all other temporary work as required to complete all work of the Contract.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his subcontractors.

C. Provide, maintain and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner if authorized by the Contracting Officer, all fences, barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, and other protective structures or devices necessary for the safety of workmen, AAFES employees, DeCA employees, the public, equipment and property.

D. All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard.


E. Pumping: Provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site, excavations and structures free of accumulations of water at all times, whether from underground seepage, rainfall, drainage or broken lines.

2.6 MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY

A. Initiate security program in compliance with Installation’s directions prior to mobilization.

B. Maintain security program throughout construction period until Tyndall AFB acceptance precludes need for Contractor security.

C. Vehicle use shall be enforced as follows:

1. Keep all vehicles, mechanized or motorized equipment locked at all times when parked or unattended on site.

2. Do not leave vehicle unattended with engine running or with ignition key in place. 3. Parking will be permitted only in areas designated by Tyndall AFB BCE. 4. All traffic control shall be subject to Tyndall AFB Safety Office and Traffic Control

approval.

D. Comply with requirements set forth in Paragraphs 2.3 and 2.4 for secure closure of all window openings during window replacement operations.

2.7 ENTRANCE CONTROL

A. Provide control of all construction personnel and vehicles entering and leaving project site and building.

B. Unauthorized Entry:

1. Maintain provision for closing and locking the building as soon as possible. 2. When exterior work is in process such as concrete finish work, the Contractor shall

maintain a night watchman on the premises until such time that the work cannot be harmed or damaged.

C. Damage or Theft:

1. Protect the work and material to be used on the project, from damages or loss due to the elements, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, or other causes.

2. Contractor shall be held responsible for such damages, or loss, which he shall remedy at his expense.

2.8 TOOL AND EQUIPMENT SECURITY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of tool and equipment storage security program prior to commencement of work.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with tool and equipment security program and shall inform all workers of specific requirements affecting each craft.

C. Storage of tools and equipment will be allowed within the facility.


2.9 PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain, during the life of the project, a weather tight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide, having not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking.

1. The bulletin board shall be mounted where, and as approved by the Contracting Officer, in a prominent place, accessible to employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors, and to applicants for employment.

2. The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed by him upon completion of the contract work.

B. The following information, which will be furnished by Tyndall AFB to the Contractor (except safety posters), shall be posted on the bulletin board, and shall be maintained by the Contractor in an easily readable condition at all times for the duration of the Contract:

1. The Equal Employment Opportunity Poster and Notice of Nondiscrimination of Employment (Standard Form 38).

2. Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the contract schedule of minimum rates as required by the Davis-Bacon Act.

3. Safety posters.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Consult with Contracting Officer, review site conditions and factors that affect construction procedures and construction aids, which may be affected by execution of the work.

B. Coordinate requirements for enclosures and installation procedures with Tyndall AFB BCE representative(s).

3.2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL

A. Provide temporary facilities, barriers and controls for use when necessary to avoid delay in performance of Contract and maintain until no longer necessary or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent construction.

B. Locate temporary facilities, barriers and controls where they will suitably serve Project, result in minimum interference with performance of Work and least interfere with AAFES or DeCA operations.

C. Relocate and modify temporary facilities, barriers and controls as Work progresses to maintain criteria set forth above.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Contracting Officer schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

2. Remove before Substantial Completion.


3. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and maintain Project site, excavations and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Sections for requirements pertaining to waste disposal and recycling, including disposal of materials controlled by Tyndall AFB.

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed new opening cuts in exterior of existing building.

1. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

2. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or adjacent to areas of Work where overhead hazard exists.

1. Coordinate with entrances, other temporary facilities, barriers, controls and obstructions.

2. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and requirements indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and after completion from the following:


1. Exposure, inclement weather, other construction operations and similar activities. 2. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

F. Temporary Barriers: Provide floor-to-roof deck dustproof barriers to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by AAFES, their tenants and DeCA from fumes and noise.

1. Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required, provide a single layer of 6-mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet.

a. Tape all joints and provide fire resistive treated 2 x 4 wood or metal stud top and bottom runners and verticals 4 foot o.c. with polyethylene sheet wrapped and taped to the runners.

b. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.

c. At Contractors option the specified Zipwall temporary barrier system may be used in lieu of field constructed temporary dust barriers.

2. Opaque Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required and where indicated for long duration separation of construction operations from AAFES, their tenant spaces and DeCA, provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction side with 6-mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet with taped joints and perimeter.

b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire taped on the AAFES/tenant/DeCA side from floor to ceiling.

c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from unconditioned construction areas.

d. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.

3. Security Weather-tight Barrier: Where a secure weather-tight barrier is required and where a temporary exit enclosure through surrounding and overhead construction is indicated, provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction or exterior side with ½ inch plywood. b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire-taped on the AAFES/DeCA/public side on

entire enclosure. c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from the

exterior, unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas.

d. Panelize framing for ease of removal and relocation.

G. Temporary Opening Protection: Provide temporary rated and non-rated hollow metal doors and frames or suitable equivalent of substantial construction as approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.


1. Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each access through the barrier. b. Doors shall be hinged with latches and provided with padlocks in accordance

with AAFES and DeCA security. c. Maintain adhesive surfaced foot mats in door locations.

2. Security Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each exterior opening through barrier. b. Doors and frames shall be hollow metal and of substantial gauge and

anchorage to provide secure enclosure. c. Set doors and frames to swing in the direction of exit travel. d. Provide hinges, exit devices and closers with exit devices always operable in

the direction of exiting and locked on the opposite side.

H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses and in compliance with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site.

a. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures.

b. Post warnings and information.

3.5 REMOVAL

A. Upon Contracting Officer's prior written authorization, completely remove temporary materials and equipment.

B. Clean and repair all damage caused by installation.

C. Restore to original conditions.

END 01500.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01510 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and/or maintain during construction period:

1. All temporary utilities for construction:

a. Electricity. b. Lighting. c. Heat. d. Ventilation. e. Telephone service. f. Water. g. Sanitary facilities.

2. All temporary utilities listed above for temporary field offices and storage sheds. 3. Pay utility fees and use charges not specifically identified herein. 4. All temporary utilities in excess of those specified, or exceeding capacity of

existing or permanent systems.




C. Section 01590 – Field Offices and Sheds.

D. Section 01620 – Storage & Protection.

E. Section 02083 – Asbestos Abatement.

F. Division 15 – Mechanical.

G. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 UTILITY PROVIDERS

A. AAFES and DeCA will pay for utilities consumed for this Project (water, sewer, gas and electricity) as related to building construction.

B. Contractor shall pay prevailing rates to utility owner for utilities used for temporary offices, construction trailers and storage sheds if needed.

C. Utilities information:

1. Water



2. Sewer:

a. Owner: Tyndall AFB (J & J Utilities). b. POC: Mr. Tim Lewis. c. Phone: (850) 283-4884.

3. Natural gas:

a. Owner: TECO. b. POC: Mr. Mike McGuire. c. Phone: (850) 258-1223.

4. Electrical power:


1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Obtain and pay for permits and inspections required by governing authorities.

B. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.

1. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 2. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 3. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 4. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 5. National Electrical Safety Code. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Standards. 7. Federal and State Requirements.

1.5 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. AAFES and DeCA will furnish source for temporary water from existing water service within the building.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary water service from source to be used for construction needs, fire protection, cleaning and miscellaneous use throughout the construction period.

1. The temporary water service shall originate after the meter from the building water source as coordinated with Contracting Officer or designated representative and Store Manager.

2. Extend piping from source to points as needed for construction in compliance with referenced Codes and regulations of Tyndall AFB BCE.

3. Size temporary water service as needed for construction operations. 4. Provide certified reduced pressure zone (RPZ) backflow protection. 5. Provide water hoses from source to point of operations.

C. Do not route temporary water piping on grade, floor or roof during construction and provide drip pans under each temporary water connection where damage to new materials could result.

D. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of water usage during construction.

E. AAFES and DeCA will pay for the cost of water consumed during construction.


F. Contractor shall pay for temporary extension of AAFES and DeCA furnished water source and all additional costs for permits, connection fees, and water used for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds.

1.6 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC FOR PROJECT CONSTRUCTION

A. AAFES and DeCA will furnish source for temporary power from existing power panels in the building.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary secondary electric load center for construction needs throughout the construction period per Tyndall AFB BCE standards.

1. The temporary electric service shall be a 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 200 amp minimum service for construction operations.

2. Provide a power center temporarily mounted to the building consisting of the following:

a. Main disconnect. b. 20 amp, 120/208 volt circuits as necessary, each protected by a circuit

breaker, for use by all trades.

1.) All outlets shall be grounded. 2.) Outlets shall be located so that no extensions are more than 100 feet

in length.

3. Users shall provide grounded, Underwriters’ Laboratories approved extension cords from power center to point of operations.

C. The temporary electric service or extension of existing service shall comply with the National Electric Code.

D. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of power usage during construction.

E. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of five (5) foot candles in all work areas.

1. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

2. Provide guarded lighting sockets and lamps.

a. Use 100 watt lamps, minimum. b. Maintain socket voltage of 100 volts minimum in lighting system.

3. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 4. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

F. AAFES and DeCA will pay for the cost of electricity consumed during construction.

G. Contractor shall pay for temporary extension of AAFES and DeCA furnished power source and all additional costs for service or service extensions and electricity used for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01590 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Contractor may use the permanent heating system for construction purposes under the following conditions:


1. Contractor shall obtain approval for use and operation of the system from the Contracting Officer and verify proper filters are in place.

2. Contractor shall provide and pay for maintenance and shall provide new filters and replace any damaged or worn parts immediately and until final acceptance by AAFES and DeCA.

B. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of energy usage during construction.

C. AAFES and DeCA will pay for natural gas and electricity consumed by the temporary and permanent heating equipment.

D. Contractor shall pay for extension of AAFES and DeCA furnished temporary heating source, any additional costs for consumables used during temporary heating of construction areas, and those costs required for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01590 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.8 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. Contractor shall provide, install and maintain temporary cooling in the construction areas throughout the construction period to facilitate the progress of work, protect work against dampness, condensation, and to provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper installation and curing of materials.

B. Contractor may utilize the permanent cooling system to maintain temperatures and humidity during construction.

1. Extend and supplement with temporary cooling devices as needed. 2. Maintain conditions during the installation of finish materials as specified in

individual specification Sections.

C. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F (26 degrees C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, the contractor shall obtain approval for use and operation of the system from the Contracting Officer and verify filters are in place.

E. Contractor shall provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts immediately and until final acceptance by AAFES.

F. AAFES will pay for utilities consumed by the temporary and permanent cooling equipment.

G. Contractor shall pay for extension of AAFES furnished temporary cooling source, any additional costs for consumables used during temporary cooling of construction areas, and those costs required for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01590 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.9 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation to:

1. Aid in curing installed materials.


2. Dispersal of humidity. 3. Ventilation of temporary sanitary facilities. 4. Prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases in areas

occupied during construction.

B. Contractor shall employ the use of temporary ventilating equipment, adequately sized to accomplish the required ventilation.

C. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of power usage for ventilation during construction.

D. AAFES and DeCA will pay for electricity consumed by the temporary and permanent ventilation equipment.

1.10 TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization.

B. Refer to Section 01590 - Field Offices and Sheds.

1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Phasing of Project shall be accomplished to maintain one functional toilet facility within the building at all times for use by customers and employees but not for use by construction personnel.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities and enclosures for use by construction personnel and authorized parties throughout construction period.

1. Existing facility use in this or nearby buildings is not permitted. 2. Provide at time of project mobilization.

C. Furnish, install, and maintain adequate portable chemical toilets.

D. Provide regular maintenance service to maintain clean and sanitary conditions.



END 01510.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01590 – FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS

FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS 01590-1

1 GENERAL


A. Temporary field offices, construction trailers and sheds.

B. Maintenance and cleaning.

C. Removal.



B. Section 01010 – Summary of Project.

C. Section 01420 – Environmental Protection.

D. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

E. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS

A. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used, adequate for required purpose.

B. Temporary field office and storage sheds may be furnished at Contractor’s option for this Project.

1. It is the intent of this Section to establish a minimum standard of quality for a temporary field office and storage sheds.

2. Should Contractor determine the need for such temporary facilities they shall be furnished in compliance with requirements set forth below.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Buildings: Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storage spaces.

1. Maintain during progress of Work. 2. Remove at completion of Work.

C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements.

D. Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to Tyndall AFB BCE.


E. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and bases.

F. Lighting for Offices (At Contractor’s Option): 50 ft-C (538 lx) at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.

G. Fire Extinguishers: One 10# standard dry chemical (ABC) type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area.

H. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products.

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) heating and 76 degrees F (23 degrees C) cooling.

B. Storage Spaces (At Contractor’s Option or as Required for Materials being Stored): Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain Products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.

2.4 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES

A. Size:

1. To meet Contractor's needs. 2. Minimum size for office space shall be 100 square feet.

B. Telephone:

1. At Contractor’s option he shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service for the Contractor's field office including an answering device and outside bell.

2. Mobile telephones will be acceptable providing non-interrupted service can be established between the Contractor and the following:

a. Contracting Officer or designated representative. b. Project Manager. c. Tyndall AFB BCE. d. Architect-Engineer. e. All other relevant parties including major subcontractors and material

suppliers.

C. Internet:

1. Contractor shall provide high speed internet service for Contractor's field office throughout the duration of Construction.

2. High speed internet service shall be made available for use by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

D. Furnishings: Contractor's option.

E. Equipment:

1. Four (4) adjustable band protective helmets for visitors. 2. One (1) 10 inch (250 mm) outdoor weather thermometer. 3. Weather protected bulletin board for posting information required by the contract.


2.5 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS

A. Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections.

B. Allow for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.

B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not permitted on Installation property.

3.3 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Weekly cleaning services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas.

B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.

3.4 REMOVAL

A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas.

END 01590.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01600 – MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1

1 GENERAL



1. Specified materials and equipment. 2. Transportation and delivery. 3. Equipment and personnel at site. 4. Coordination of delivery for Materials and Equipment. 5. Coordination of space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment. 6. Coordinate and provide space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment

delivered by AAFES, AAFES Vendors and DeCA.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01030 – Substitutions & Product Options. 3. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules. 4. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls. 6. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 7. Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds. 8. Section 01620 – Storage and Protection. 9. Section 01710 – Cleaning. 10. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents. 11. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation:

1. Provide three (3) copies to the Contracting Officer. 2. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until

completion. 3. Retain an additional three (3) sets of complete instructions for insertion in Operation

and Maintenance Manuals to be submitted at Final Completion.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Contracting Officer for further instructions.

2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK

A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.

B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by Contracting Officer.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2

C. Manufactured and fabricated products:

1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with best engineering and shop practices. 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be

interchangeable. 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to

unless variations are specifically approved in writing.

D. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified.

E. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead paint, PCB's or other hazardous materials.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site.

1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of contract documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.

C. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of assemblies or equipment to permit easy identification of parts and to facilitate assembly.

D. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent scraping, marring or other damage to products, equipment or surrounding surfaces.

3.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. In accord with Section 01620.

END 01600.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01620 – STORAGE & PROTECTION

STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01620-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and maintain:

1. Coordination of location for storage of materials with Tyndall AFB BCE. 2. Storage for materials and equipment to be installed in project. 3. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site. 4. Maintenance and protection for products, materials and equipment after installation

and until completion of project. 5. Cooperate and assist in storage and protection of equipment.


A. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules. 3. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 4. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 5. Section 01600 – Materials & Equipment. 6. Section 01710 – Cleaning. 7. Section 01720 – Project Closeout. 8. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340, submit:

1. Request for allocation of storage space, if applicable. 2. List of materials and equipment to be stored. 3. Proposed location for storage. 4. Special storage requirements. 5. Schedule of anticipated storage dates.

1.4 STORAGE

A. Obtain permission from Tyndall AFB BCE and coordinate with appropriate authorities for suitable storage area on Project Site or in the vicinity of the Project Site and as indicated.

B. Store products immediately on delivery, and protect until installed in the work.

C. Store in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures.

1. Maintain temperatures within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide humidity control for sensitive products, as required by manufacturer's

instructions. 3. Store unpacked products on shelves, in bins or in neat piles, accessible for

inspection.

E. Exterior Storage:

1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking or skids to support fabricated products above ground.

a. Prevent soiling or staining. b. Cover products, subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the

elements, with impervious sheet coverings. c. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces such as paved areas, or provide plywood or sheet materials to prevent mixing with foreign matter.

STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01620-2

a. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater. b. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious material or liquids.

F. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection.

1. Do not inhibit use of:

a. Fire lanes and exits. b. Roadways. c. Adjacent properties.

G. Store combustible materials in accordance with applicable regulations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE

A. Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to assure that:

1. State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected. 4. Any weathering of products, coatings and finishes is not acceptable under

requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Provide continuous maintenance for all temporary structures.

C. Repair or refinish damaged or weathered portions of structure as required to maintain in specified condition.

D. Repair or replace defective utility connections required for temporary utilities.

E. Clean storage areas at least once a week.

1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations and remove when no longer needed, prior to completion of work.

B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment and surfaces.

C. Provide coverings to protect finished surfaces from damage.

1. Cover projections, wall corners, and jambs, sills and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of products in subsequent work.

2. Protect finished floors and stairs from dirt and damage:

a. In areas subject to foot traffic, secure heavy paper, sheet goods, or other materials in place.

b. For movement of heavy products, lay planking or similar materials in place. c. For storage of products, lay tight wood sheathing in place.

D. Waterproofed and roofing surfaces:

1. Prohibit use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of any products. 2. When some activity must take place in order to carry out the contract, obtain

recommendations of installer for protection of surface.

a. Install recommended protection and remove on completion of that activity. b. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.

E. Landscaping:

1. Protect and prohibit activities that could damage landscaping. 2. Prohibit traffic of any kind across planted areas.

2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END 01620.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01700 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Substantial Completion.

B. Final Inspections.

C. Closeout Submittals.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. General Provisions of the Contract: Final Acceptance and Payment.

B. Section 01340 – Submittals.

C. Section 01650 – Systems Startup.

D. Section 01710 – Cleaning.

E. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Contracting Officer that project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete.

2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.

B. Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:

1. Contractor shall prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer, a list of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the inspection.

2. Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, containing:

a. Date of Substantial Completion. b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by

Contracting Officer. c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items. d. Time and date AAFES and DeCA will assume possession of work or designated

portion thereof. e. Responsibilities of AAFES or DeCA and Contractor for:

1.) Utilities. 2.) Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems. 3.) Maintenance and cleaning. 4.) Security.

f. Signatures of:

1.) Contracting Officer. 2.) Contractor.


3. AAFES occupancy of project or designated portion of project:

a. Contractor shall perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01710. b. AAFES and DeCA will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of

Substantial Completion.

4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

D. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:

1. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to contracting officer,

certifying that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete. 3. Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Facility Representatives and

are operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements of contract documents, he shall request contractor to make project closeout submittals.

D. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send

second written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete. 3. The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Project Record Documents: Specified requirements of Section 01720.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manuals", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:


1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section.

a. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers.

b. Identify the following:

1.) Significant design criteria. 2.) List of equipment. 3.) Parts list for each component. 4.) Operating instructions. 5.) Value chart. 6.) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 7.) Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

8.) End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. All approved shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. e. Training Sessions attendance roster.

E. Submit seven (7) copies of the operation and maintenance manuals as follows:

1. Contracting Officer: One (1) copy. 2. AAFES General Manager: Two (2) copies. 3. DeCA: Two (2) copies. 4. Tyndall AFB BCE: Two (2) copies.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings and specifications.

B. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up.

C. After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item.

D. In addition to instructions given at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be given a classroom instruction course on operation and maintenance of the systems. Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) continuous hours where practical.

E. Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.

1.8 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIES:

A. Upon completion of project and prior to final payment Contractor shall furnish warranties as required by Contract and technical Sections of Specifications.


1. Contractor shall fully warrant all labor and materials for a full year following Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance of the Project by the Contracting Officer as required by the Contract for Construction in compliance with requirements set forth in Exhibit F of the Solicitation Package.

2. All applicable products, materials, systems and equipment entering into the Work shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s standard commercial warranty for a period of not less than one (1) year.

3. In addition to the standard warranty there are products, materials, systems and equipment designated in the Technical Sections of the specifications that shall be warranted beyond one (1) year.

a. Refer to Technical Sections for extended warranties beyond one (1) year. b. Provide manufacturer’s fully executed warranty for specified period,

commencing on date of Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance, covering items listed.

4. All warranties shall be properly executed in four copies (1 original and 3 copies) by Contractor and submitted in conjunction with the O & M Manuals at Project Closeout for distribution to AAFES, DeCA and Tyndall AFB BCE.

B. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under contract.

C. Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year.

D. Submit separate extended warranties and guarantees for portions of work where Technical Sections of the specifications require longer periods of time.

1. Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods on these items.

E. Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by Contracting Officer.

F. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result of abuse, neglect by AAFES or DeCA, or his successor(s) in interest.

1.9 DD FORM 1354:

A. Preparation of DD Form 1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property":

1. At the conclusion of the project the Contractor will compile and furnish to the Contracting Officer cost information and quantity data:

a. Itemized list of structures, building elements and systems, including quantities of materials, that were demolished.

b. Itemized list of new structures, building elements and systems, including quantities of materials, that were furnished and installed under this project.

2. A list of items for which the costs and quantity data are required will be furnished to the Contractor.

B. Such information shall be returned to the Contracting Officer within 10 days from the receipt of the list.

C. Contractor shall prepare and submit a copy of DD Form 1354 to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to Tyndall AFB BCE office at completion of Project.


D. DD Form 1354 Attachments:

1. Department of Defense Instruction, Form 4165.40. 2. Suggested Instructions for Preparing DD Form 1354. 3. Checklist for Buildings Info for DD Form 1354 & Real Property Card. 4. Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property, DD Form 1354.



END 01700.

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

1


2


3

SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354 (TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY)

1. The page number and the total number of pages comprising each transfer shall be shown in the space provided at the top

right-hand part of the form. 2. When two or more pages are required, Items 27 through 29 shall be completed only on the final page. In such cases, the

bottom portion of the form shall be torn off of all pages, except the final page, at the line above Items 27 and 28. ITEM 1 - Self – explanatory ITEM 2 - Primarily for Navy use, the district number will be assigned by area or district public works office in accordance with coding pattern set forth in NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 6. For Army use, enter appropriate Army Engineer district where construction is performed and/or from which the transfer is made. For transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter appropriate Army Engineer district or the district number assigned by area, or Naval district public works office from which the construction transfer is made. ITEM 4 - For Navy use only, see NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 5. ITEM 5 - Enter date of preparation. ITEM 6 – For Army use, enter appropriate Army job and directive number. For Air Force use, enter base job number, as appropriate, when form is used for transfer within the Air Force. ITEM 7 – For Army use, or for transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter separate series of numbers, by fiscal year, for each installation to which real property is transferred; e.g., for FY 1962 show 62-1, 62-2, etc. For Navy use, this serial number will be assigned by respective area or district public works office and will represent the numerical sequence of submissions by respective contract number. ITEM 8 – Insert appropriate contract number. ITEM 9 – Self-explanatory. ITEM 10 – 12: Instructions for Items 2,3 and 4 apply. (not applicable for Air For Use.) ITEM 13 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to or used by the activity named in accordance with Item 9. See NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 10. ITEM 14 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to the activity performing the official property accounting for the activity shown in Item 9. See NAVCompt Manual, Vol. 2, Chapter 5, for accounting numbers. ITEM 15 – Insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (A) to indicate whether the transfer involves new construction, existing facilities or capital improvements to existing facilities. If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. Additionally, insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (B) to indicate whether transfer is being made at time of beneficial occupancy, physical completion or financial completion (with respect to new construction). If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. ITEM 16 – Enter the code number assigned to identify the project with the appropriate construction authorization law. ITEM 17 – Each single entry will be identified as an item number and this item number will be shown in this column. ITEM 18 – 19: Category Code and Description. Enter the category code and description (see DoD Instruction 4165.3 (reference (a) ) or attachment 1 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)) that appropriately describes the primary use for which the facility (buildings, structures, utilities) is designed. Not more than one category code (Item 18) will be listed as a line item (Item 17).


4

ITEM 20 – Number of Units in terms of buildings or other structures. ITEM 21 – Type – enter type of construction; i.e., “P” for permanent, “S” for semipermanent or “T” for temporary. ITEM 22 – Enter the unit of measure abbreviation, such as “SF” for square feet, etc. (see attachment 2 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)). ITEM 23 – Enter total quantity as described In Item 22. ITEM 24 –Indicate by item number, category code, and description the appropriate cost. In those instances where a document is prepared which lists items carrying costs which, in some cases, may be final and in others may be preliminary, each cost figure by line item will carry an alphabetical suffix of (P) for preliminary or (F) for final. ITEM 25 – 31: Self-explanatory. #First amendment (Ch 1, 7/28/67)

HQ

Arm

y &

Air

Forc

e Ex

chan

ge S

ervi

ce

D

esig

n C

riter

ia M

anua

l

EX

HIB

IT J

TRA

NSF

ER A

ND

AC

CEP

TAN

CE

OF

MIL

ITA

RY

REA

L PR

OPE

RTY

P

AG

E O

F P

AG

ES

1.

FRO

M: (

Inst

alla

tion/

Act

ivity

/Ser

vice

) 2.

O

PE

RA

TIN

G

UN

IT

3. D

IS

TRIC

T C

OD

E

4. O

PE

R

ATI

NG

AG

ENC

Y

5. D

ATE

6.

JO

B N

UM

BE

R

7. S

ER

IAL

NU

MBE

R

7. C

ON

TRAC

T N

UM

BER

15. T

YPE

OF

TRAN

SA

CTI

ON

1.

FR

OM

: (In

stal

latio

n/A

ctiv

ity/S

ervi

ce)

2.

OP

ER

ATI

NG

U

NIT

11

. D

IS-

TRIC

T C

OD

E

12.

OP

ER

A

TIN

G

AGEN

CY

13. A

C

CO

UN

TIN

GN

UM

BER

14. A

C

CO

UN

T-O

FFIC

E N

UM

BER

NEW

CO

NST

R

EXIS

TIN

G F

AC

C

AP

ITA

L IM

P

OTH

ER

(SPE

CIF

Y)

B

EN

F/O

PH

YSIC

AL

CO

M

FI

N. C

OM

OTH

ER

(S

PEC

IFY)

16.

PRO

JEC

T N

UM

BER

ITE

M

NO

.

17

CAT

EGO

RTY

C

OD

E

18

FAC

ILIT

Y (c

ateg

ory

desc

riptio

n)

19

NO

. OF

UN

ITS

20

TYPE

21

UN

IT

OF

ME

AS

22

TOTA

L Q

UAN

TITY

23

CO

ST

24

DR

AWIN

G

NU

MBE

RS

25

REM

ARKS

26

41

65

27.

STA

TEM

ENT

OF

CO

MPL

ETIO

N:

The

faci

lites

list

ed h

ereo

n ar

e in

acc

orda

nce

with

map

s, dr

awin

gs,

and

spec

ifica

tions

and

cha

nge

orde

rs a

ppro

ved

by th

e au

thor

ized

repr

esen

tativ

e of

the

usin

g ag

ency

exc

ept

for t

he d

efic

ienc

ies l

iste

d on

the

reve

rse

side

.

28. A

CC

EP

TED

BY

(Sig

natu

re)

DA

TE

TRA

NS

FER

RE

D B

Y (S

igna

ture

)

Title

(Are

a E

ngr./

Base

Eng

r/ D

PWO

)

DAT

E TI

TLE

(Pos

t Eng

r./B

ase

Eng

r./N

avy

Rep

.) 29

. PR

OP

ER

TY

VO

UC

HER

NU

MBE

R

DD

FO

RM

1 N

0V 6

1 135

4

SUPE

RSE

DES

EN

G F

OR

MS

290

AN

D 2

90B

AN

D N

AV

DO

CK

S FO

RM

231

7

4165.40 (Encl 1) Nov 14, 61

5 of 11


Page 6 of 11

30. CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES

31. REMARKS

This form has been designed and issued for use in connection with the transfer of military real property between the military departments and to or form other government agencies. It supersedes ENG Forms 290 and 290B (formerly used by the Army and Air Force) and NAVDOCKS Form 2317 (formerly used by the Navy). Existing instruction issued by the military departments relative to the preparation of the three superseded forms are applicable to this form to the extent that the various items and

columns on the superseded forms have been retained. Additional instructions, as appropriate, will be promulgated by the military departments in connection with any new items appearing hereon. With the issuance of this DD form, it is not intended that the department shall revise and reprint manuals and directives simply to show the number of this DD form. Such action can be accomplished through the normal course of revision for other reasons.


Page 7 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 CATEGORY CODES: VERIFY FOR ARMY FACILITIES AND AIR FORCE FACILITIES OF THE SAME DESCRIPTION • • • (ABBREVIATION-NOMENCLATURE) * DESCRIPTION: ARMY AIR FORCE SHOPPING CENTER: (EXCH MAIN RETL) : 740-53 (EXCH SALES STORE) 740111 SHOPPETTE (EXCHANGE BRANCH) :740-50 (EXCH BRANCH) 740382 CLASS SIX (CLASS VI) :740-84 (BSE PACKAGE STORE) 740269 CAR CARE CENTER (EXCH SVC STA) :740-52 (EXCH SVC STN) 740383 BURGER KING (POST RESTAURANT) :740-64 (EXCH CAFE SNK BAR) 722345 CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST

1. BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE: A.RETAIL AREAS:___________SF B. ADMIN/EMPLOYEE AREA_________SF C. MPA:___________SF D. SERVICES ACTIVITIES: ____________________SF E. FOOD ACTIVITIES________SF. F. MALL/PUBLIC TOILETS: ___________________SF G. MERCH. EQUIP. RM______SF H. TOTAL BLDG:___________SF

2. BUILDING $ _____________________ (TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE LESS THE SUM OF THE FOLLOWING) 3. HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM $ _____________________ TOTAL:_________________TONS

(AR)826-11 OVER 100 TONS (AC PL OV 110 TN) (AF)826123 OVER 100 TONS (A/C PLT OVET 100 TN) (AR)826-12 26-100 TONS (AC PL-26-100 TN) (AF)826122 25-100 TONS (A/C PLT 25<100 TN) (AR)826-13 6-25 TONS (AC PL 6-25- TN) (AF)890121 5-25 TONS (A/C PL 5 TO 25 TN)

4. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (FIRE ALARM SYS) AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM $______________________

(AR)880-50 (AUTO SPNLKR SYS) (AF)880221 (AUTO FR DTECTN SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ FOAM FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (AR)880-60 (AUTO SPNKLR SYS) $______________________ (AF)980235 (DRY CHEM SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ (AR)843-11 FIRE HYDRANTS $______________________ (AF)843315 (FR HYDR)

5. UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (INCLUDE. METER $______________________ (AR)812-42 UNGD ELEC DISTR) (AF) (SEC DISTR LNE UG) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:___________L.F OF____IN. CONDUIT AND_____________CONDUCTOR


Page 8 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 6. ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER $______________________

(AR)813-60 (TRANSFORMER) (AF)812225 (PRIM DISTR LNE UG) PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER____________KVA

7. NATURAL GAS LINE TO BUILDING (INC. METER) $______________________ (AR)824-10 (GAS PIPE LIBE) (AF)824464 (GAS MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________)

8. UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE $______________________ (AR)..... (UNDG TELEPHONE) (AF)135583 (TEL DUCT FCLTY) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. CONDUIT

9. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)832-10 (SANITARY SEWER) (AF)932267 (SAN SEWAGE MAIN) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL: _________________)

10. GREASE INTERCEPTOR $______________________ (AR)833-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) CAPACITY ___________GALLONS

11. STORM SEWER SYSTEM

(AR)871-10 (STORM SEWER) (AF)871183 (STRM DRN DSPL) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) TOTAL NUMBER OF DROP INLETS:___________

12. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)842-10 (WATER PIPE LN P) (AF)842245 (WTR DISTR MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING :____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)

13. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM $______________________ (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER) (AR)871-30 (IRRIGATION FAC) TOTAL NUMBET OF HEADS_________________

14. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE $______________________ (AR)833-12 (REFUSE COLL BLD) TOTAL AREA:_____________S.F.


Page 9 of 11


CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 15. PAVING (NON ORGANIZATION VEHICLE PARKING) $______________________

(AR)852-15 (NON ORG VEH PRK) (AF)852262 (VEH PKING N/ORGN) TOTAL ASPHALT PAVING:___________S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL TOTAL CONCRETE PAVING:_________ S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL

16. CONCRETE WALKS, SLABS & PADS $______________________ (AR)852-20 (SIDEWALK) (AF)852289 (SIDEWALK) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC TOTAL AREA:____________S.F. (EXCLUDING PAVER TILES)

17. CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS $______________________ (AR)851-10 (ROADS PAVED) (AF)851143 (CURBS & GUTTERS) TOTAL AREA:____________L.F.

18. EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING (EXT LIGHTING) $______________________ (AR)812-30 (EXT LIGHTING) (AF)812926 (EXTERIOR AREA LTG) TOTAL NUMBER OF POLES______________________

19. LANDSCAPING (RELATED LAND IMPROV NB) $______________________ (AR)871-75 (RELATED LAND INPROV NB)

20. GASOLINE DISPENSING SYSTEMS $______________________ (AR)411-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS: NUMBER OF TANKS:_____ SIZE:______ GALLONS NUMBER OF DISPENSERS:__________ NUMBER OF HOSES:_______________ CANOPY SIZE:______ SF $_________________ KIOSKS: NUMBER________MGFR____________ COST $ ____________________

21. CHAIN LINK FENCING (FENCE OR WALLS) $______________________ (AR)872-10 (FENCE OR WALLS) (AF)872248 (FENCE INTERIOR) TOTAL LINEAR FEET:_______________L.F.

22. TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS: $______________________


Page 10 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS H.V.A.C. UNITS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. EXHAUST FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. SUPPLY FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. CHILLER BOILER HEAT PUMP ROOFTOP A/C UNITS DOCK LEVELERS DOCK SHELTERS ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANELS / LIGHT FIXTURES ITEM NO MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY DESCRIPTION PLUMBING # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ WATER HEATER WATER CLOSET WATER CLOSET (H.C.) URINAL LAVATORY LAVATORY (H.C.) FLOOR SINKS(___#) FLOOR DRAINS(___#) MOP SINK ROOF DRAINS (___#)


Page 11 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR FOOD ACTIVITIES ANSUL CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TYPE OF SYSTEM:____________ TOTAL NUMBER OF: HEADS_________ AUTOMAN RELEASE_________ REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATIONS___________ SNAP ACTION ASSEMBLIES__________________ MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES________’

ITEMS REQUIRED IN CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S TESTING / TRAINING REPORTS: A. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT ON MECHANICAL SYSTEMS B. CERTIFICATION OF GROUNDING (RESISTANCE) POWER TRANSMISSION C. INSTRUCTION / TRAINING SESSIONS ON ALL MECH/ELEC/EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING PARTICIPANTS’ ROSTER) 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 3. ROOF(S) WARRANTY 4. ELECTRIC WARRANTY 5. HVAC WARRANTY 6. GREENHOUSE WARRANTY 7. TERMITE PROTECTION GUARANTEE 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT ON “NO ASBESTOS BEARING MATERIALS” USED IN CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01710 – CLEANING

CLEANING 01710-1

1 GENERAL


A. Progress Cleaning.

B. Final Cleaning.


A. General Provisions of the Contract.


C. Section 01045 – Cutting and Patching.

D. Section 01590 – Field Office and Storage Sheds.

E. Technical Sections of the Specifications – Cleaning Requirements.

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance standards:

1. The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General Safety Requirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident Prevention.

B. O.S.H.A. Standards:

1. The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Standards. 2. The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes may affect the

Contractor in his performance under the contract. 3. It is the Contractor's responsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes,

and comply with all requirements.

C. Hazards Control:

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.

D. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm

or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.

CLEANING 01710-2

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.

D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off of Government property in accordance with Sections 01420.

E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.

1. Do not drop or throw materials from heights. 2. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted.

G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning.

B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces.

C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Broom clean and power wash paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

G. Clean all glass.

H. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.

I. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air H.V.A.C. units were operated without filters during construction.

J. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by AAFES and DeCA.

END 01710.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01720 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section 01340 – Submittals.

B. Section 01650 – System Start-up.

C. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at job site, one copy of:

1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings. 5. Change Orders. 6. Other Modifications to Contract. 7. Field Test Records.

B. Store documents in field office apart from documents used for construction.

C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.

D. File documents in accordance with Project Filing Format of Uniform Construction Index.

E. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.

F. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

G. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.3 MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide red colored pencils for all marking.

1.4 RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT" in 2 inch high printed letters.

B. Keep record documents current.

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction.

1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced

to permanent surface improvements.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2

3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by change order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings.

E. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark up each section to record:

1. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. 2. Other matters not originally specified.

1.5 SUBMITTAL

A. Transmit one (1) complete edited set of As-Built Record Document mark-ups to Tyndall AFB BCE for review.

1. Resubmit until Tyndall AFB BCE approves Documents for use in developing electronic copies for distribution.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each record document. 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 6. Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative.

C. Using approved Documents Contractor shall make electronic modifications to original Contract Documents Drawings and Project Manual at his expense.

D. Tyndall AFB BCE will receive corrected As-Build Record Documents from Contractor in electronic format and the following number of hard copy sets:

1. AAFES:

a. Two (2) sets. b. One (1) CD.

2. DeCA:


3. Tyndall AFB:


END 01720.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02070 – Selective Demolition

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide phased selective demolition of the following exterior elements as indicated:

a. Roof elements:

1.) Sheet metal parapet wall coping covers. 2.) Sheet metal through wall overflow scuppers and spillouts. 3.) PVC through wall spillouts. 4.) Wood parapet blocking. 5.) Warranted parapet wall modified bitumen base flashings and cant

strips. 6.) Spud warranted modified bitumen roofing system for patching.

b. Building elements:

1.) Miscellaneous hooks and anchors protruding from face of existing concrete spandrel and wall panels.

2.) Miscellaneous plaster soffit cutting and removal for lighting fixtures.

c. Electrical work:

1.) Disconnects and circuiting work required for backlighted signage. 2.) Disconnects, fixture removal and circuiting work required for soffit

lighting fixtures.

2. Temporarily remove selected exterior elements and salvage for reinstallation in new construction:

a. Salvage, protect and store Exchange building signage including, but not limited to:

1.) Temporary hanging banner signage. 2.) Backlighted, spandrel mounted wall pylon signage. 3.) Backlighted, spandrel mounted X and EXCHANGE building entry

identification signage. 4.) Branch circuiting, conduit, power supply transformers and wiring

related to lighted signage for extension to new surfaces.

b. Salvage, protect and store wall mounted Café signage for reinstallation in new construction.

c. Salvage, protect and store wall mounted sconce lighting fixtures at both sides of Dining Room entrance for reinstallation in new construction:

1.) Wall mounted sconce fixtures. 2.) Branch circuiting, conduit and wiring related to sconce fixtures for

extension to new surface.

d. Salvage, protect and store Commissary building signage including, but not limited to:


1.) Backlighted, spandrel mounted COMMISSARY building entry identification signage.

2.) Branch circuiting, conduit, power supply transformers and wiring related to lighted signage for extension to new surfaces.

B. Each Subcontractor:

a. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, underpinning and other means necessary to protect existing structure and building elements to remain during demolition of their respective parts.

b. Coordinate phasing of Work with Contracting Officer or designated representative, AAFES and DeCA Store Managers to minimize disturbance of normal operation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. 01010 – Project Summary. 2. 01420 – Environmental Protection. 3. 02300 – Earthwork. 4. 02910 – Sod Lawns. 5. 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6. 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 7. 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 8. 06100 – Rough Carpentry.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule in accord with Sections 01310 and 01340.

B. Submit record drawings in accord with 01720.

1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. This Project shall require phased construction in order to maintain operation at all times during construction activities.

B. This Project will be constructed at an occupied military retail facility:

1. AAFES and DeCA will occupy the entire facility for the purpose of normal operations during construction of Work.

2. Contractor shall be required to phase construction in order to maintain normal operations at all times during construction activities.

1.5 SUSPECT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Existing modified bitumen roofing systems have recently been independently replaced over the Exchange and the Commissary parts of the building and are under manufacturer’s warranties.

1. Due to the relatively recent replacement of these roofs no new inspection, sampling and testing of suspect materials anticipated to be disturbed under the scope of this Project were tested prior to issuance of these Contract Documents.

2. The possibility exists that remnants of original modified bitumen roofing systems materials could be present under new roofing materials.


a. Original modified bitumen field roofing materials were previously tested prior to the more recent roof replacements and found not to be Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM).

b. No evidence exits that original modified bitumen base and parapet wall flashings were ever tested at the time field roofing materials were tested, nor that they were tested prior to the more recent roof replacements.

c. Contractor is advised that remnants of original modified bitumen base and parapet flashings could be present under newer warranted base and parapet flashings.

3. Contractor shall include in proposal the cost of a licensed Asbestos inspector to inspect, sample and test representative samples of existing base and parapet flashing as part of this work in sequence with and prior to selective demolition of these materials:

a. Report findings to Contracting Officer, designated representative, Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and Contractor.

b. Include separate line item cost in proposal for cost of specified inspection, sampling and testing.

4. At the time of Solicitation the Contractor shall assume that base and parapet flashings are ACM and include in proposal the additional cost to legally abate, haul and dispose of these materials as part of the work in strict compliance with State of Florida and Federal Rules and Regulations governing non-friable roof material abatement.

a. Contractor shall use these monies to legally abate, haul and dispose of ACM base and parapet flashings found by inspection at no additional cost to AAFES, DeCA or Tyndall AFB.

b. Contractor shall include separate line item cost in proposal for this additional cost for legal abatement, hauling and disposal work.

5. Should Contractor provided inspection, sampling and testing specified in 3. above result in negative findings for ACM, Contractor shall credit the additional abatement, hauling and disposal costs back to AAFES by Amendment to the Contract for Construction.

a. Contracting Officer, upon evaluation of report generated by licensed Asbestos inspector finding negative ACM results, may issue a Proposed Change Order to the Contractor for this line item credit.

b. Contractor shall complete paperwork and the additional cost for abatement, hauling and legal disposal will be deducted from the Contract for Construction.

c. Contractor shall continue with selective demolition of base and parapet flashings handling as normal construction waste.

1.6 DISCOVERED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. If the Contractor encounters other suspect ACM, LBP or other potentially hazardous materials not identified in paragraph 1.5 above, immediately notify Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and the Contracting Officer.

1. Immediately cease work until resolution is determined by Tyndall AFB. 2. Make immediate notifications to Tyndall AFB and the Contracting Officer. 3. Advise Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing of the extent and

time delay anticipated where such materials are encountered. 4. Refer to Sections 01010 and 01420 for information pertaining to encounter of

potentially hazardous materials.


1.7 HAZARDOUS WASTE STREAM MATERIALS

A. Following is a summary of materials that may be potentially hazardous and shall require special precautions for legal demolition and disposal:

1. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's):

a. Lighting ballasts.

2. Mercury Containing Lamps and Devices:

a. Exterior HID lamps. b. Mercury vapor lamps.

3. Other potentially hazardous materials identified:

a. Batteries. b. Hydraulic door closers. c. Fire extinguishers. d. Grease trap tanks. e. Lead plumbing vent flashings.

4. PCB ballasts shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

5. Mercury containing lamps and devices shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of Tyndall AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

B. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas.

C. Maintain protected and secure egress and access to site and building at all times.

D. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices in accord with Sections 01000, 01060, 01420 and 01500.

2. PRODUCTS (Not applicable.)

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Execute cutting and patching in accordance with these Specifications.

B. Erect and maintain secure weatherproof closures for exterior openings in accord with Section 01540.

C. Protect existing items not indicated to be demolished.

D. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas and permanently cap services shown on drawings.

E. Mark location of disconnected utility services and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents in accord with Section 01720.


3.2 SALVAGED ITEMS

A. Salvage designated items scheduled for reuse, store and protect from damage prior to restoration work.

B. Salvaged items shall be free from damage due to removal and storage operations at time of reinstallation in Work.

3.3 EXECUTION

A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner.

1. Protect supporting structural members and existing construction to remain. 2. Coordinate roof patching with requirements of Section 01500.

B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.

C. Remove materials to be salvaged and reinstalled or retained in manner to prevent damage.

1. Protect in a manner to maintain in original condition at time of construction. 2. Store salvaged items in accord with Section 01620.

D. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered in compliance with all regulatory requirements and laws, whether referenced herein or not.

E. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

F. Upon completion of work:

1. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. 2. Leave areas in clean condition. 3. Reinstall salvaged items as indicated.

END 02070.

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK Section 02300 – EARTHWORK

EARTHWORK 02300-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide:

a. Excavation and backfill for new concrete column plinth foundations. b. Coordination of testing laboratory services for compaction of fill materials.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels. 2. 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 3. 01400 – Quality Control. 4. 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services. 5. 01420 – Environmental Protection-AAFES. 6. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 7. 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 8. 09913 – Textured Coatings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate earthwork with other work and with stages of construction to allow a uniform, orderly sequence of operations without delay to total project and without undue interference with construction or AAFES and DeCA operations.

B. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative and Tyndall AFB BCE before starting work.

1. Identify existing utility lines and coordinate with utility owner. 2. Coordinate installation with other items related to the work.

1.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect benchmarks and existing structures; roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs designated to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic.

B. Protect existing utility mains, services and lines against damage from excavation procedures.

C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning or other methods to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from falling into excavations.

D. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath excavations from frost and freezing.

E. Protect excavations from exposure to excessive water by grading to prevent surface water runoff into excavated areas.

F. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in area until Architect/Engineer issues written notification, confirmed in writing, to resume work.

EARTHWORK 02300-2

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation: Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent stockpiling or disposal of materials removed.

B. Unauthorized Excavation: Unauthorized Excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect/Engineer.

C. Additional Excavation: Excavation required when unsuitable subgrade conditions dictate excavating to a deeper elevation.

D. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill or topsoil materials.

E. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, curbs or other man made stationary features occurring above or below ground surfaces.

1.6 REFERENCES & QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. American Association of State highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. AASHTO T 180 – Moisture-Density relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18-in Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D 1556 – Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

2. ASTM D 1557 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 56,000 ft-lbf/ft.

3. ASTM D 2167 – Test method for Density and Unit weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.

4. ASTM D 2487 – Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 5. ASTM D 2922 – Test methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 6. ASTM D 3017 – Test methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures.

C. State of Florida – Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Office of Construction-Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.

a. The provisions for method of measurement and payment do not apply. b. Reference to “Engineer” and “State” shall be interpreted to mean “Contracting

Officer” and “Federal Government” respectively.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Site Information: Empirical data and building code minimum design values were used for the basis of the design.

1. Design based upon empirical data does not warranty of accuracy or continuity of soil at all areas of the Site.

2. The Contracting Officer, designated representative or the Federal Government will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn by Contractor.

3. Contractor may perform test borings and other exploratory operations, at his or her option and expense.

EARTHWORK 02300-3

B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utility mains, services and lines in areas of excavation work.

1. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations.

2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility Architect/Engineer immediately for directions.

a. Cooperate with Tyndall AFB CE, the Contracting Officer or designated representative and utility company in keeping respective services and facilities in operation.

b. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and utility owner.

3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed or found to be abandoned, in coordination with utility companies for shutoff of services, if lines are active.

C. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.

1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, pavements and other construction from damage

caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, equipment and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340.

B. Samples:

1. Submit 10-pound samples of existing soil and each type of fill to testing laboratory. 2. All sample containers shall be identified with the name of the material source.

1.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Specification Section 01400 – Quality Control and specification Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services: Testing and analysis of soil materials.

B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D2487.

C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Composition testing as specified herein.

D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor may use any hand or mechanical equipment and methods necessary for successful completion of work except explosives.

EARTHWORK 02300-4

2.2 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Source: material classified below as Backfill, Fill Material and Select Materials shall be obtained from source outside of Tyndall AFB.

B. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, SP, GC, SC, ML and CL.

C. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups MH, CH, OL, OH and PT.

D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, wood, cellulose, organic materials and other deleterious matter subject to termite attack.

1. Subsoil used for fill shall be a fine-grained soil 50 percent or more of which passes a No. 200 sieve with a liquid limit of 50 percent or less.

E. Topsoil: Friable loam free from subsoil, roots, grass, excessive amount of weeds, stones and foreign matter; acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5; containing a minimum of 4% and a maximum of 25% organic matter.

1. Use topsoil on site conforming to these specifications where necessary to make repairs to lawn areas destroyed by construction activities.

2. Import suitable topsoil for lawn repairs if stockpiled quantity is inadequate to complete work.

F. Suitable subsoil material stockpiled on site may be used for fill.

G. Unsuitable subsoil material shall be removed from site.

H. If adequate subsoil has not been stockpiled, contractor shall import suitable subsoil material for filling.

1. Source of acceptable fill material shall be responsibility of contractor. 2. Contractor shall submit material samples to Testing Laboratory for approval prior

to importing subsoil to site. 3. Testing to determine optimum moisture content and maximum density shall be

made when a barrow pit is opened or when material appears to change.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before any cuts are made, all destructive operation and demolition shall have been completed for areas where exterior wall repair work is scheduled to progress.

B. Identify specified lines, levels, contours and data; coordinate with 01051.

C. Identify known below grade utilities: stake and flag locations.

D. Identify and flag above grade utilities.

E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area.

F. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected work.

1. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately. 2. Confirm notification in writing.

EARTHWORK 02300-5

3.2 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, filled, surfaced or built upon and stockpile in area designated on site.

B. Do not excavate wet topsoil.

3.3 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated and transport to areas requiring fill or stockpile in area designated on site until required.

B. Do not excavate wet or frozen subsoil.

C. Excavation shall be scheduled and performed in a manner to allow orderly construction of building and structures indicated.

D. Excavating areas shall not impair usefulness of existing building and structures that are to remain and shall not present a hazard to persons or property.

E. Excavating areas shall not change general pattern of existing drainage and shall be drained by sloping or channeling uniformly to a drainage outlet.

3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.

1. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.

B. Provide materials for shoring and bracing where required by conditions encountered.

3.5 EXCAVATION REMEDIATION

A. Unauthorized excavation, as defined in paragraph 1.5, as well as remedial work directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative shall be at Contractor’s expense.

1. Under footings and foundation bases fill unauthorized excavation by:

a. Extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation.

b. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring subgrade elevations to proper height, when acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

2. In locations other than above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect/Engineer.

B. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations notify testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer to make an inspection of conditions.

C. If testing laboratory determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered.

EARTHWORK 02300-6

3.6 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.

1. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.

2. Provide and maintain pups, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

C. Contractor shall develop a dewatering plan to be reviewed and approved by CE Environmental for any excavations required for this Project.

1. The dewatering plan shall indicate location of discharge and type of conveyance including trench, piping, sheeting or other methods.

D. Trench excavations shall not be used as temporary drainage ditches.

3.7 DUST CONTROL

A. Contractor shall periodically sprinkle or spray with water all areas being worked on as required to control dust.

B. Water must be uniformly applied as a spray; the use of open-end hoses will not be allowed.

C. Extreme care shall be exercised when applying water to avoid raising moisture content beyond allowable limits.

3.8 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 feet.

B. Footing and foundation excavations:

1. Footing excavations shall be of dimension of footing where nature of soil stability will permit accurate cuts and square corners.

2. If soil stability dictates use of forms, extend a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal concrete formwork.

3. Allow sufficient clearance for installation of services, other construction and for inspection.

C. Do not disturb bottom of excavations.

1. Excavate to final grade by hand just prior to placement of reinforcing steel. 2. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other

work.

3.9 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet as directed by Architect and cover to protect from erosion.

1. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

EARTHWORK 02300-7

2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Do not store within drip line of existing trees to remain.

B. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed by Architect as for topsoil.

C. Excess excavated soil material and material not acceptable for use as backfill or fill shall be disposed of off Base in a legally permitted landfill site.

3.10 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits but not until completion of the following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, waterproofing and perimeter insulation.

2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording location and depths of underground utilities.

3. Removal of formwork. 4. Removal of all shoring, bracing and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported

walls.

B. Backfill areas to contours, elevations and dimensions indicated, compacting each lift prior to placement of overlying lift.

C. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement.

D. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

E. Common fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers as specified herein.

1. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers.

2. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to satisfactory moisture content. 3. Finish to a smooth surface by blade, rolling with a smooth roller, or both.

F. Backfill, Fill Material and Select Material:

1. Place and compact backfill material adjacent to structure as the structural elements are completed and accepted.

2. Backfill against concrete only when approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structures.

G. Aggregate Base: Place and compact materials specified in Section 02750, Site Concrete Work and Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

H. Place topsoil in equal continuous layers as specified herein and where indicated, taking care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of utilities.

I. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

J. Maintain optimum moisture content of materials to attain required compaction density.

K. Backfill against supported foundation walls and structures or backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported walls until supports are in place.

EARTHWORK 02300-8

L. Provide a positive grade away from building a minimum of 2 inches in 10 feet unless indicated otherwise.

M. Make gradual grade changes and blend slope into level areas.

N. Remove surplus imported backfill materials completely off from government property and legally dispose.

O. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.11 COMPACTION

A. Method of compaction and equipment used shall be at Contractor’s option but must produce acceptable results.

B. Compacting equipment and operations shall be coordinated with rate of placing so that required density is obtained.

C. Special care shall be exercised in compacting adjacent to structures and in sharp depressions.

1. Where such areas are inaccessible to compacting equipment being generally used, material shall be placed in 4-inch horizontal layers and uniformly compacted with suitable mechanical equipment.

2. Power-driven, rider-operated spreading, compacting, heavy equipment shall be kept a minimum of 4 feet away from building, sanitary sewer and storm drainage structures.

D. All subgrade material shall be compacted to not less than the following percentages of maximum standard laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor) test methods:

1. Subgrade not supporting buildings or surfacing: 90 percent. 2. Subgrade supporting buildings or surfacing: 98 percent. 3. Areas requiring compaction to support buildings or surfacing shall extend a

minimum of 3 feet beyond limits of structure being supported.

E. Moisture Content: Within 2 percent of optimum moisture content determined in accord with ASTM D-1557.

1. If compaction is performed while moisture content of material is more or less than specified, additional operations as required to obtain required compaction shall be performed by Contractor.

2. No adjustment in price or contract amount will be allowed on account of any such additional work nor on account of delays occasioned thereby.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing services shall be supervised by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida.

B. Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.

C. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method) as applicable.

EARTHWORK 02300-9

D. Footing Subgrade:

1. For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least two tests to verify required design bearing capacities.

2. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least ten field density tests at random locations and elevations as determined appropriate by the Testing Agency Engineer.

F. Building Slab Subgrade:

1. Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 500 square feet of building slab, but in no case fewer than five tests.

2. In each compacted fill layer, perform at least one field density test for every 500

square feet of overlaying building slab but in no case fewer than five tests.

G. If, based on testing service reports, inspection and review by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, subgrade fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained.

3.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL

A. Distribution and removal of materials and equipment:

1. Remove and dispose of debris and unsuitable soil materials off site. 2. At completion of grading operations remove equipment from site.

B. Repair damage resulting from building excavation and backfill operations.

C. Leave stockpile areas and entire job site clean and raked, ready to receive topsoil and landscaping.

3.14 CLEANUP

A. Perform cleanup during installation of work and upon completion of work.

B. Repair damage resulting from excavation operations to satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and Tyndall AFB CE.

END 02300

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02910 –SOD LAWNS

SOD LAWNS 02910-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Sod bed preparation and placing. b. Sodding lawns c. Mulching and fertilizing d. Limited maintenance. e. Clean Up

B. The extent of lawn work includes lawn areas damaged by construction activities and may not be necessary subject to Contractor’s diligence in protecting existing site conditions.

1. Refer to Section 01010, Project Summary for requirements related to protection of existing site elements and lawn areas.

2. The lawn work limits equal the area(s) where existing grade is damaged by construction activities.

3. Non-paved, non-roofed areas within these area shall receive lawn or a vegetative ground cover as indicated.

4. Lawn areas shall receive four (4") inches settled depth of topsoil prior to placement of sod.

5. Existing lawn areas that are not disturbed require no additional work.

C. Contractor provide materials, labor, equipment, and services required to accomplish related work as indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. 02300 – Earthwork.

B. 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish name of Landscape subcontractor or Nurseryman to perform lawn work and obtain Contracting Officer’s or designated representative’s approval.

B. Provide Material Certificates and MPD for:

1. Sod species and source, location for sod producer. 2. Limestone. 3. Fertilizers.

C. Provide Topsoil Test Report: Submit test results from independent testing laboratory on their letterhead reporting:

1. Certify soil texture and content, pH value, sieve and nutrient analysis. 2. Specific recommendations on liming and fertilizing (nitrogen, phosphate and

potash).

D. Schedule: Prior to construction, provide a schedule that addresses lawn thresholds involving erosion control stabilization.

SOD LAWNS 02910-2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer: Work shall be contracted to an established Landscape subcontractor or Nursery firm having sufficiently experienced crews, supervisor(s), specialized equipment, and an excellent record of performance on completed lawn projects of comparable size, scope, and quality.

B. Provide expert turfman to direct the work in the field on a regular, daily basis.

C. Sod Standards: Comply with the American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) class of sod materials.

D. Nomenclature: Seed names shall conform to the National Turfgrass Federation, Inc.

E. Delivery, Storage, and Handling:

1. Deliver fertilizer materials in original unopened containers clearly showing weight, analysis by weight and name of manufacturer.

2. Store in cool, dry place in a manner to prevent wetting and deterioration.

1.5 SOD DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Cut, deliver, and install sod within a 24-hour period.

B. Do not harvest or transport sod when moisture content may adversely affect sod survival.

C. Protect sod from sun, wind, and dehydration prior to installation.

D. Do not tear, stretch or drop sod during handling and installation.

E. Store materials at site in an orderly manner at location(s) acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Sod:

1. Unless otherwise directed in writing by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, sod lawns from:

a. Spring: 15 March to 15 May. b. Fall: 15 August to 01 November. c. Sodding between 16 May and 14 August is not acceptable unless

adequate water supply will be available throughout the specified timeframe.

2. Place sod only when ground surface is free of frost. 3. Proceed with and complete sodding work as rapidly as portions of the site

become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

4. Perform sodding after planting, fine grading, and other work affecting the ground surfaces in the work areas has been completed satisfactorily.

5. Provide sod as specified.

SOD LAWNS 02910-3

6. Substitutions not permitted unless approved in writing by Amendment prior to Solicitation.

7. Provide water, meters, labor, hoses, sprinklers and watering equipment. 8. AAFES will pay for the water usage if required.

B. Construction Review:

1. Upon completion of sod bed preparation, notify Contracting Officer or designated representative to review work.

2. The Contracting Officer or designated representative may review string graded areas by the Contractor to check for surface smoothness and general compliance with grading requirements.

a. Fill or cut by hand raking or other acceptable means to achieve smooth, even well-draining lawn surfaces free of "bird baths" and breaks in grade as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative at no additional expense to AAFES.

b. Review by string grading shall not alleviate the Contractor of his responsibility for conforming to the required grades as shown on the drawings, nor be misconstrued as final acceptance of lawn work.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOD

A. Sod shall conform to FDOT specifications, nursery grown pasture sod of Pensacola Bahia blend.

B. Provide well-rooted, healthy sod, free of diseases, nematodes and soil borne insects.

1. Provide sod uniform in color, leaf texture, density, and free of weeds, undesirable grasses, stones, roots, thatch and extraneous material viable and capable of growth and development when planted.

2. Sod is considered free of weeds when less than five (5) weeds are found per one hundred (100 s.f.) square feet.

C. Furnish sod machine stripped and of supplier's standard width, length, and thickness:

1. Uniformly 1" to 1-1/2" thick with clean cut edges. 2. Mow sod before stripping.

D. Mowing Height: Before stripping, sod shall be mowed uniformly at a height of 1 to 1-1/2 inches.

E. Thickness of Cut:

1. Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of 5/8 inch, plus or minus 1/4 inch, at the time of cutting.

2. Measurement for thickness shall exclude top growth and thatch.

F. Thatch: Sod shall be relatively free of thatch, up to 1-2 inch allowable (un-compressed).

SOD LAWNS 02910-4

G. Pad Size:

1. Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the supplier's standard width and length.

2. Maximum allowable deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be plus or minus 1/2" on width and plus or minus 5% on length.

3. Broken pads and torn or uneven ends will not be acceptable.

H. Strength of Sod Sections: Standard size sections of sod shall be strong enough to support their own weight and retain their size and shape when suspended vertically from a firm grasp on the upper 10% of the section.

2.2 LIMESTONE

A. Shall be ground limestone in the producer's standard bags containing not less than 85% total carbonates and conforming to the following gradations:

Sieve Designation % Passing No. 100 50-100 No. 20 100

2.3 FERTILIZER

A. Starter Fertilization:

1. Immediately prior to seeding fertilizer with a commercial starter fertilizer, granular, non-burning product, with not less than 50% organic slow acting, micro nutrients and 1% iron, guaranteed analysis commercial fertilizer.

2. Fertilizer shall contain: 15% nitrogen, 24% available phosphorus and 19% water soluble potash (15-24-19).

3. Apply at a rate of 4 lbs/1,000 sf or 175 lbs/acre.

B. Subsequent and Final Fertilizations: Apply commercial fertilizer, granular non-burning product with not less than 50% organic slow acting, guaranteed analysis:

1. For Spring Lawn Work:

a. Fertilizer shall contain: 10% nitrogen, 6% available phosphorus, and 4% water soluble potash (10-6-4).

b. Apply at rate of 10 lbs/1,000 s.f. or 400 lbs/acre or as recommended by the topsoil testing agency for maximum growth.

2. For Fall Lawn Work:

a. Fertilizer shall contain: 5% nitrogen, 10% available phosphorus, and 5% water soluble potash (5-10-5).

b. Apply at rate of 10 lbs/1,000 s.f. or 400 lbs/acre or as recommended by the topsoil testing agency for maximum growth.

2.4 WATER: Free of substance harmful to lawn, other plants, humans and animals.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify limits of lawn in the field with drawings but in no case less than the extent of areas disrupted by construction and construction activities.

SOD LAWNS 02910-5

B. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative of discrepancies prior to proceeding with lawn work.

C. Examine finish surfaces, grade, topsoil quality, and depth.

D. Do not start lawn work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARE GENERAL LAWN AREAS TYPE

A. Perform a pH test, sieve, and nutrient analysis of the topsoil and advise the results to the Contracting Officer or designated representative prior to adding limestone or other soil amendments.

B. Remove debris:

1. Remove stone 3/4" or larger by handpicking, fine tooth aluminum grading rakes, and/or mechanized stone picker.

2. When topsoil has hardened, cultivate soil to a four (4") inch depth by plowing, discing, harrowing, or otherwise scarifying and loosening the topsoil.

C. Grade lawn areas to a smooth, free draining even surface with a loose, moderately coarse texture.

1. Roll, scarify, rake, and level as necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces and fill depressions as required to drain.

2. Correct irregularities in the surface resulting from tillage operations to prevent formation of depressions or water pockets.

D. Cultivate soil to provide a firm bed of minimum of four (4") inches deep, free of clods, stones, or foreign matter over two (2") inches in diameter from the top of soil.

1. Do not move heavy objects except necessary lawn making equipment over the lawn areas after the soil is prepared unless it is again loosened and graded.

2. Remove stones greater than one 3/4" in diameter during cultivation. Level undulations and irregularities in the surface.

E. Provide adjusted rate of application as recommended in Topsoil Test Report submittal and when rate differs add ground limestone at the rate of 100 lbs. per 1,000 S.F. or equivalent acidifier as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. Place starter fertilizer at the rate of 4 lbs. per 1,000 S.F. and mix into full depth of topsoil.

G. Rake area with fine toothed aluminum grading rake before placing sod to obtain a smooth surface at the proper elevation.

1. Drag area with a wood float to level out minor humps and hollows. 2. Beds shall have a smooth friable uniform surface, free of areas ponding water.

3.3 SODDING

A. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative that sod bed is ready for review as specified in Job Conditions.

SOD LAWNS 02910-6

1. Obtain Contracting Officer or designated representative's approval prior to sodding.

B. Moistening the Soil: During periods of higher than optimal temperature for species being specified and after unevenness in the soil surface has been corrected, the soil shall be lightly moistened immediately prior to laying the sod.

C. Sod immediately after preparation of bed and Contracting Officer or designated representative's approval.

D. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly-fitted joints in strips parallel to contours.

1. Butt ends and sides of sod strips. 2. Do not overlap edges. 3. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. 4. Remove excess sod to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. 5. Provide sod pad top flush with finish grade of adjacent curbs, pavements,

drainage structures and seeded areas.

E. Do not lay dormant sod or install sod on soil surfaces that are hot, dry, saturated or frozen.

F. When sodding slopes, install initial row of sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slope.

G. Place subsequent rows parallel to and lightly against previously installed row.

H. Sod strips laid in drainageways must meet the finished grades shown on the drawings.

I. Stake sod on lawn slopes 3H to 1V (horizontal to vertical) and steeper to prevent slippage.

1. Use two (2) stakes per square yard of sod. 2. Stakes are to have their flat sides against the slope and be driven flush with

sod surface.

J. Roll with light lawn roller to ensure contact with subgrade.

K. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after laying.

L. Do not allow sod to dry out.

3.4 STANDARDS FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF LAWNS

A. Review to determine substantial completion of lawns will be made by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, upon request.

B. Provide notification at least five (5) working days before requested review date.

C. Lawn areas will be substantially complete provided requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with.

1. A healthy, vigorous, uniform, partially mature stand of lawn is established free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.

SOD LAWNS 02910-7

2. This will culminate after an approximate 60 day period with average temperatures above 40°F of maintenance including watering, protection, repair, mowing, core aerating, weed control, and fertilizing as noted above.

3. Grass roots shall have matured to a minimum of 1½" depth as determined by the Contracting Officer or designated representative when core samples are taken.

D. Lawn areas shall not have more than 10% dead/bare spots.

E. The Contracting Officer or designated representative will prepare a written punch list of items that need correction prior to final acceptance.

3.5 STANDARDS FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF LAWNS

A. Review to determine final acceptance of lawns will be made by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, upon request.

1. Provide notification at least five (5) working days before requested review date.

B. Lawn areas will be acceptable provided requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with.

1. A healthy, vigorous, uniform, full stand of lawn is established free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.

2. Grass roots shall have matured to a minimum of 2" depth as determined by the Contracting Officer or designated representative when core samples are taken.

C. Any lawn which contains disease, more than 2% dead/bare spots, or any dead/bare area greater than one square foot shall be rejected and the unacceptable area(s) repaired as originally specified at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. In the event the Contractor fails to complete the punch list items within a 30 day period with average temperatures of 40°F after the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for any additional costs including those charged by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.6 CLEAN UP

A. During the contract and at intervals as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative and as lawn work is completed, clear the site of extraneous materials, rubbish, and debris.

B. Leave the site in a clean, safe, neat, well-draining condition.

END 02910.

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Concrete column plinth foundations. b. Concrete column plinths. c. Adhesive anchorage of reinforcing steel into existing concrete footings,

foundations and sidewalks. d. Formwork. e. Reinforcing. f. Surface finish and curing. g. Joint sealants. h. Assistance for testing concrete.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified Elsewhere:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 2 – Site Work. 3. 05400 – Cold-formed Metal Framing. 4. 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 5. 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.


1. Building related excavation and backfill work is specified in Section 02300, Earthwork.

2. Joint sealants installed under this Section are specified in Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.

B. Product Data: For each type of product used under this Section.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

1. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

2. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures.


3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Waterstops. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials.

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

D. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.

B. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

1. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 2. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

C. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.


F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave non-corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.

1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire or plastic according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.

2. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms and in bottom of trench or wall footing cuts use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. At Contractor’s option, supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b. Maximum Content: No more than 15 percent.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

1. Provide aggregates from a single source. 2. 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Fine aggregate free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures:

1. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

2. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

a. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. b. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. c. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. d. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.


e. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/ C 494M, Type G.

f. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of nonmetallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents and capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 8000 psi in 28 days.

D. Adhesive Anchor System: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

1. Powers Fasteners – Pure110+

2.6 STANDARD CURING MATERIALS FOR UNPOLISHED CONCRETE

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

F. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall comply with the requirements of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated (3,500 psi, minimum) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches

before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.


4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301.

a. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.

C. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used and limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 15 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover.

2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging.

1. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. 2. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

Lace overlaps with wire.


3. Supply welded wire reinforcement in flat sheets only.

3.3 JOINTS

A. General:

1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 2. Refer to special requirements for joint cutting as specified in Section 03 35 36,

Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

B. Isolation Joints:

1. Install joint-filler strips at junctions with column plinths and vertical surfaces such as foundation walls, grade beams, pre-cast concrete wall panels and other locations as indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

D. Cold weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 306R-88.

E. Hot weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 305R-99.

3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.

1. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. 2. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. 3. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view including plinth edge surfaces.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.

2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces.

1. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

1. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.


2. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to top plinth surfaces exposed to view to form a ¼” minimum sloped wash from existing precast concrete columns to upper chamfered perimeter edges of plinth.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General:

1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

2. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder:

1. Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.

2. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Standard Curing Methods: Cure standard formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. d. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive

covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.

a. Cure for not less than seven days. b. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

E. Protection: Protect concrete plinths throughout construction until received by installer for installation of cold-formed steel framing, sheathing and limestone veneer finish.


A. Testing Agency: contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports to Contracting Officer or designated representative during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.


B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.

1. Inspections at project site shall include the following:

a. Steel reinforcement placement. b. Headed bolts and studs. c. Verification of use of specified design mixture.

2. Testing at project site shall include the following:

a. Slump. b. Concrete temperature. c. Air content. d. Compressive strength.

3. Record the following information on submitted test reports.

a. Date of placement. b. Location of Placement. c. Time of day. d. Outside air temperature (degrees F.). e. Slump (in inches). f. Concrete temperature (degrees F.). g. Air content (%). h. Date received in lab. i. Compressive strength with testing date, age in days and strength in psi.

4. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cubic yards but less than 25 cubic yards, plus one set for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof.

5. Within 24-hours after each pour measure floor slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E-1155.

3.9 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.

END 03300.

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY Section 04850 – NATURAL THIN VENEER STONE

NATURAL THIN VENEER STONE 04850-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Plant cut limestone veneer panels. b. Plant cut limestone banding trim profiles. c. Plant cut limestone veneer wash caps. d. Integrated extruded metal stone anchoring system. e. Vinyl in-wall flashing and sash cord weeps. f. Anchor fasteners and all accessories for complete installation of veneer

panels.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 7. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.

B. Installed but furnished elsewhere:

1. Section 07920 – Building and Paving Joint Sealers. (Joint fillers and sealants.)


A. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain exposed natural stone veneer panels of uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics from one manufacturer.

2. Obtain extruded metal anchoring system, integrated by fabrication processes, to be fully compatible with natural stone veneer panel manufacturer’s kerfed panels.

B. Performance requirements:

1. General: Stone anchors and anchoring systems shall be designed in accordance with ASTM C 1242.

2. Structural Performance: Provide veneer stone cladding system capable of resisting the effects of gravity, wind and seismic pressures calculated according to the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) for components and cladding and after multiplying the results by a 1.25 factor of safety.

3. Building Code: International Building Code (2012) governs the work.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited references, or specified portions thereof, current at date of Bidding Documents unless otherwise specified, govern the work.

1. If conflict between cited standards and project specifications do not proceed with any work:


a. Contractor shall consult with Architect-Engineer for determination of governing standard.

b. Architect-Engineer will issue written clarification.

2. Proceed with work based on determination after receipt of written clarification.

B. ASTM C 119 - Standard Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone (Definitions).

1. Dimension Stone Cladding System: An exterior wall covering systems consisting of dimension stone panels together with anchors, fasteners and sealants used to secure the stone to building structure and to produce a weather-resistant cladding.

C. Standards:

1. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. 3. ASTM C 97 - Standard Specification for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of

Dimension Stone. 4. ASTM C 99 - Standard Specification for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. 5. ASTM C 170 - Standard Specification for Compressive Strength of Dimension

Stone. 6. ASTM C 568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone. 7. ASTM C 880 - Standard Specification for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone. 8. National Concrete Masonry Association TEK 8-2A for masonry cleaning.

D. Manufacturer’s Catalogs: Manufacturers catalogs, current at the date of Bidding Documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if repeated herein at length.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01 33 00:

1. Product Data: Supplier’s published data attesting to compliance with applicable specifications for:

a. Natural thin veneer stone masonry system. b. Plant cut stone profiles. c. Anchoring system. d. Sealants, flashing materials and other specified accessories.

2. Instructions: Supplier's written instructions and recommendations:

a. Preparatory instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements. c. Installation methods. d. Cleaning methods.

3. Shop Drawings detailing locations, quantities, profiles, lengths and dimensional data for all plant cut stone:

a. Wall cladding. b. Banding trim profiles. c. Anchoring system integration with stone panels and trims.

B. Design Data: Provide structural analysis, sealed by a Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida, and attesting to system capability of resisting specified loads in accordance with ASCE 7.

C. Quarry Certificates: Prior to delivery submit supplier’s certificates attesting compliance with the project specifications for stone properties.


D. Samples for selection purposes:

1. Stone veneer samples in hand panels or sample boxes showing full extent of colors available for exposed veneer panels and textures.

a. Contractor shall submit samples of stone veneer in manufacturer’s full range of colors and textures.

b. Contracting Officer will make final selection of color and texture to be used in construction.

1.) If reviewed samples result in rejection of any samples furnished by Contractor the Contracting Officer will make recommendations on sources for additional samples.

2.) Contractor shall obtain additional samples until a satisfactory color is approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Stone Quarrier: Company with 5 years documented experience specializing in provision of quarried products specified in this Section.

B. Stone Masonry Subcontractor: Company with 5 years documented experience in performing work of the Section.


A. Stone Materials: Stone shall be standard grade, free of crack or seam, which may impair structural integrity or function and shall comply with specified industry standards and practices.

B. Pre-installation Conference: Contractor shall conduct a pre-installation conference, in conjunction with Division 1 requirements, to include representatives involved in the work of this Section to review and verify:

1. Project requirements. 2. Substrate conditions. 3. System fabricator’s installation instructions. 4. Other requirements.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver all materials in sufficient quantity and time to maintain approved construction schedule.

B. All stone products shall be received and unloaded at the site with necessary care in handling to avoid damaging or soiling.

C. Protection:

1. Store products off ground on level platforms or pallets that allow air circulation and prevent absorption of moisture.

2. Do not stack pallets. 3. Cover and protect against contamination by mud, dust, materials likely to cause

staining or wetting prior to use. 4. Protect anchor system materials and fasteners from the elements. 5. Handle materials on pallets or flat bed barrows.

D. Remove materials and damaged containers immediately from the site.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NATURAL THIN VENEER STONE SYSTEM

A. Integrated natural thin veneer stone and anchoring system shall be manufactured by American Limestone Company, 1095 Highway 183 North, Liberty Hill, TX 78642, (512) 778-5232.

1. Stone shall be cut from one block or contiguous, matching blocks in which natural markings occur.

2. Fabrication tolerances shall be in accordance with the Limestone Institute of America, “Indiana Limestone Handbook”.

B. Natural thin veneer stone cladding:

1. Manufacturer’s standard Panel 101 cladding set in a running bond pattern with ¼-inch sealant joints as indicated.

2. Size: Provide units produced to the following dimensions within the tolerances specified:

a. Thickness: 1-inch, (actual). b. Height: Nominal 12-inches, (11 ¾” actual). c. Length: Nominal 24-inches, (1’-11 ¾” actual).

1.) Long edges shall be factory kerfed at center of 1-inch thickness to receive anchorage system.

2.) Kerf dimensions:

a) 0.070-inch wide. b) ½-inch deep.

3. Lengths of units may be wet-sawn in the field to maintain running bond pattern or wet-sawn to length during fabrication at Contractor’s option.

4. Color and Texture: Standard "Cream" color with honed face and natural variation.

C. Natural thin veneer stone banding trim::

1. Manufacturer’s modified Profile 220-T, Tuscan banding trim set in continuous lengths to band clad column bases as indicated.


a. Thickness: 2 ½-inches, (actual). b. Height: 5 ¾-inches, (actual). c. Length: As indicated.

1.) Long edges of banding trim unit shall be factory kerfed so that back face of trim aligns with back face of cladding for alignment to receive anchorage system.

2.) Kerf dimensions:

a) 0.070-inch wide. b) ½-inch deep.

d. Wash edge: Top outside edge of profile shall be factory sloped 1/8-inch from outside face to 1 ½-inches as indicated to form a wash chamfer top surface for drainage.

3. Lengths of banding trim shall be factory returned 4-inches at one end of each unit to provide uniform returns at all outside corners.



D. Natural thin veneer stone column base wash caps:

1. Manufacturer’s Panel 101 cladding cut in continuous lengths with ¼-inch head joints mitered at corners.


a. Thickness: 1-inch, (actual). b. Width: Nominal 5 ½-inches, (±5 ½” actual). c. Lengths: Nominal 50-inches and 72-inches, (4’-1 ¾” and 5’-11 ¾” actual).

1.) Cap shall be shimmed ¼” at face of upper column cover cold-formed framing members to form a wash from inside to outside over top of banding.

a) Long edges shall be factory beveled to provide vertical inside and outside edges that will be plumb with vertical veneer faces of column base after cap is sloped.

b) End edges shall be compound mitered to provide clean corners with maximum joint width of ¼”.


E. Integrated veneer stone anchors:

1. Provide one-piece extruded aluminum anchoring system in profiles designed to ingrate with kerfs in cladding panels and banding trim.

a. Aluminum extrusions: Type 6063 (T6). b. Minimum thickness: 0.062-inches.

2. System shall be designed to attach to plywood sheathed cold-formed metal stud structural support and to resist specified loading.

a. Extrusion Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for size and frequency, ASTM A 167, Type 304.

2.2 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Flexible sheet flashings especially formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plassticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed masonry application, black in color and of thickness indicated below:

1. Thickness: 20 mils. 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in limestone veneer.

B. Adhesive for Flashing: Of type recommended by manufacture of flashing material for use indicated.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Vinyl Sheet Flashing:

a. “Vi-Seal Plastic Flashing”; Afco Products Inc. b. “BFG” Vinyl Water Barrier; B.F. Goodrich Co. c. “Nuflex”; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. “Wascoseal”; York Manufacturing Inc. e. “Nervastral HD”: Nervastral Waterproofing.

D. Provide 3/8 inch diameter cotton sash cord weep material in length required to produce 2 inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in bed joint between top of plywood sheathing and underside of limestone veneer.


2.3 STONE MASONRY WATER REPELLANT PRODUCTS

A. Provide a premixed, high performance, water based, clear silane/siloxane water repellant sealer designed for protecting vertical stone masonry surfaces.

1. Solution shall be colorless, non-toxic and produce no change in the appearance of the surfaces being coated.

2. Solution shall be suitable for use as a warranted, high performance, general water repelling coating on all types of vertical stone masonry.

B. Stone quarrier and supplier shall approve use of silane/siloxane water repellant sealer over specified stone masonry products prior to application.

C. Water repellant manufacturer shall approve cleaning methods and preparation of substrate to receive water repellant materials.

D. Acceptable manufacturers and products:

BRAND NAME MANUFACTURER PRODUCT

1. PROSOCO ProSoCo, Inc. Sure Klean Weather Kansas City, KS Seal Siloxane PD

2. HYDROZO ChemRex, Inc. Enviroseal Double 7 Shakopee, MN for Stone 3. EDISON Edison Coatings, Inc. System 90-W Plainville, CT

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of integrated veneer stone anchors, accessories, flashings and other moisture control products.

B. Clean all items of loose rust, ice, mud or other foreign matter before incorporating in column base construction.

1. All ferrous metals shall be galvanized prior to installation. 2. Field welded members shall receive two coats of galvanizing repair paint at

connection welds.

C. Provide temporary bracing during installation of stone veneer work, if required, and maintain bracing in place until building structure and provides permanent support.

3.3 FLASHING

A. Install all in-wall flashings.


B. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture or otherwise damage flashing materials.

C. Place in-wall flashing on top surface of column base top sheathing with outside edge extended out to beyond the face of the banding trim for subsequent trimming.

D. Extend in-wall flashing up at backside onto vertical surface of plywood wall sheathing a minimum of 8” above column base top sheathing.

E. Splices required in flashings shall be lapped 3 inches or per manufacturer’s instructions and sealed with mastic.

F. Trim outside edge of flashing material so that outside edge is ¼” behind outside edge of column base wash caps.

G. Install sash cord weeps prior to shimming and setting wash caps so that there are no less than three weep points on each exposed side of column base.

3.4 INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Inspect surfaces to ensure surfaces to support integrated veneer stone work anchorages are at proper elevation, plumb and square free of dirt and other deleterious materials.

1. Confirm that all surfaces not properly prepared have been satisfactorily corrected. 2. Acceptance of substrate surfaces means subcontractor assumes responsibility for

defects that could affect appearance of column base finish.

B. Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from anchors, ties and reinforcement prior to installation.

C. Before closing up any inaccessible spaces or shafts with veneer stone, remove all rubbish and sweep out the area to be enclosed.

D. Consult other trades and make provisions that will permit installation of their work in a manner to avoid unnecessary cutting and patching and build in work specified under other sections, as work progresses.

E. When head joint cutting is necessary for veneer stone units use motor driven masonry saw to produce clean, cut edges.

1. Do all necessary cutting to accommodate installation of miscellaneous built-in items such sleeves, anchors, grounds and other built-in items.

2. Do not cut ends of stone masonry exposed to view.

3.5 SETTING STONE MASONRY

A. Install stone veneer, cut stone trim units and mortar in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures.

B. Maintain stone veneer courses to uniform dimension(s) and form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness as indicated to receive sealant.

C. Pattern Bond:

1. Lay stone veneer in running bond pattern as indicated. 2. Take care to avoid a concentration of any one color at any column base area. 3. Maintain uniform ¼” head and bed joints.


4. Lay out work in advance and distribute natural color range of stone veneer units uniformly over total work area.

D. Anchoring: Tie stone to backing as required by the applicable Building Code and in conjunction with manufacturer’s printed instructions for integrated veneer stone anchorage system produced by veneer stone manufacturer.

1. As a minimum tie veneer stone to backing with integrated “T” shaped ties at each course.

2. Provide “J” ties at top and bottom of coursing.

E. Joints:

1. Set stone with uniform ¼” head and bed joints. 2. Insert backer rod and install textured sealant as specified in Section 07920,

Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 3. Neatly tool joints to result in a clean concave joint of uniform color and width.

F. Cutting And Fitting: Cut and fit for uniform appearance between manufacturer cut veneer stone units and field cut units.

3.6 CLEANING

A. All veneer stone surfaces shall be dry and cleaned per manufacturer’s recommendation after final tooling of joints at the end of each work day.

B. Point any sealant gaps or holes in exposed joints to match surrounding work with sealant and tool.

C. Clean all veneer stone from top down.

D. Final cleaning of veneer stone shall remove all sealant drips, stains, dirt, grease and oil.

1. Cleaning procedures shall be terminated as soon as satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Final cleaning operations shall not be started until sealant has thoroughly set and cured.

E. Protect all other finish materials, subject to damage from manufacturer’s recommended cleaning agents, from contact with cleaning agents.

F. Leave entire work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of sealant drops and broken veneer stone fragments.

3.7 WATER REPELLANT COATING APPLICATION AT STONE MASONRY

A. Provide protective covering over both vertical and horizontal surfaces that will be subject to damage, staining or streaking as a result of the application of water repellant materials.

1. Protect metal, glazed masonry walls and glazed areas from damage. 2. Protect existing landscaping, grass areas, sidewalks and surrounding surfaces,

including vehicles, from damaging over spray. 3. Thoroughly clean and rinse any areas where over spray causes staining or

streaking and immediately make reparations to damaged surfaces at no cost to AAFES, DeCA or Tyndall AFB.


B. Do not apply coating unless moisture content of masonry surface is within limitations recommended by sealer manufacturer.

1. Surfaces shall be tested with a moisture meter. 2. In no case shall coating be applied less than 5 days after cleaning operation have

been completed and final inspection for staining has been accomplished.

C. Apply masonry water repellant coating to veneer stone masonry products only with spray equipment as recommended by manufacturer for maximum penetration and even coverage in order to obtain warranted system.

1. Confirm compatibility of water repellant coatings with veneer stone manufacturer and sealant manufacturer prior to application of product.

2. Do not apply water repellant coating to glazed surfaces. 3. Completely cover glazed surfaces to protect from overspray.

D. New veneer stone masonry shall be treated with one coat of product installed in strict compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

E. Comply with all regulations regarding Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content and installation for water repellant materials.

F. Inspect and recoat any areas that contain thin spots or skips and to comply with manufacturer’s recommended application rates.

G. Inspect and clean any water repellant coating that has streaked or produces white film appearance for surfaces and recoat areas to comply with manufacturer’s recommended application rates and to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect sills, ledges and offsets from EIFS droppings and damage during subsequent construction.

B. Remove misplaced EIFS materials immediately.

C. Protect face materials against staining.

D. Cover top of walls with non-staining waterproof coverings when work is not in progress. Provide minimum 2-foot overhang of protective covering each side of column bases and securely anchor.

E. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.

END 04850.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05400 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Column base structural framing. b. Column enclosure structural framing. c. Entry fascia structural framing. d. All related fabricated steel framing accessories. e. All related anchors clips and fasteners. f. All related anchor bolts. g. All miscellaneous rough hardware items needed for proper installation of non-

load bearing metal framing. h. All labor to complete installation of cold-formed metal framing system.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04850 – Natural Thin Veneer Stone. 4. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems-Class PB. 7. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 8. Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO).


1. Coordinate wood blocking and other requirements for termination of cold-formed metal framing system with Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definition below is based on description of delivered minimum thickness in AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness:

1. Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project Site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-formed framing design.

2. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.

C. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.


B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and galvanized-coating thickness.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

E. AISI Specifications:

1. Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing.

2. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work.

C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:

1. Power-actuated anchors. 2. Mechanical fasteners. 3. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Framing Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems. 2. Telling Industries. 3. MBA Building Supplies.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 33 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch and less; 50, Class 1 or 2 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and greater.

2. Coating: G90.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Exterior Column Base and Enclosure Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (14 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch.

B. Exterior Column Base and Enclosure Steel Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0713 inch (14 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

C. Exterior Entry Fascia and Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:


D. Exterior Entry Fascia and Wall Steel Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:


E. Miscellaneous Exterior Steel Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:



F. Miscellaneous Exterior Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:


G. Steel Headers: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0598 inch (16 gauge) unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch. 4. Tracks: Provide manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, compatible with

wall and header framing, in design thickness to match header sections.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5. Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

1. Head Type:

a. Low-profile head beneath sheathing. b. Manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

E. High Strength Bolts: Install high strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.


2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout:

1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water

required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by screw fastening unless indicated

otherwise or where welding is the only means to make connection. 4. Where welding is indicated or required:

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by bolting or screw fastening in strict accordance with Shop Drawings.

6. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses and lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.

2. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.


3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints.

2. Maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels shall not exceed 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by screw fastening unless indicated

otherwise or where welding is the only means to make connection. 3. Where welding is indicated or required:

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed.

F. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.

1. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:


1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.

2. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs.

1. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends.

B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks.

1. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 2. Space studs as indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

E. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing.

1. Locate headers above openings as indicated. 2. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to

supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

3. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings.

4. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

2. Provide coordination between this work and that of carpentry Prime Contractor so that wood blocking is installed properly to fasten finish work.

G. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches or the dimension indicated on Shop Drawings apart.

1. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

2. Fasten at each stud intersection.

H. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, shear wall bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period.

C. Ensure that cold-formed metal framing will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering for work by other trades.

END 05400.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Galvanized steel plates for column enclosure anchorages. b. Galvanized threaded rods and adhesive anchors. c. Galvanized steel angles for column enclosure ledger support. d. Galvanized steel channel sections for column enclosure bracing. e. Aluminum fixed sunshade/canopy outrigger brackets. f. Galvanized steel plates for outrigger/spandrel backing. g. Miscellaneous steel angles, plates, brackets and inserts for mounting and/or

fastening items to structural support. h. Erection of metal fabrications. i. Anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts. j. Expansion anchors and screw type masonry fasteners. k. Rough hardware. l. Miscellaneous bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners.

B. Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, rods, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere.

1. All fasteners, bolts and anchorage devices necessary for complete installation of items.

2. Galvanized coatings necessary for protection of metal fabrication items exposed to the exterior shall be included under this work.

C. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and in specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. 04850 – Natural Thin Veneer Stone. 4. 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB. 6. 10711 – Fixed Sunshades & Canopies.

B. Furnished elsewhere:

1. Concrete for footings and filling of steel pipe bollards furnished under this Section is specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Sealants for use with metal fabrications are specified in Section 07920, Building Joint Sealants and shall be provided wherever joints between metal fabrications and dissimilar materials occurs to ensure weather tightness.

3. Fixed sunshade and canopy structures related to aluminum brackets furnished under this Section are specified in Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies and may be fabricated here or under that Section by sunshade and canopy structure manufacturer.


1.3 REFERENCES

A. AA ADM-1 "Aluminum Design Manual", 2010 Edition.

B. Aluminum Specifications:

1. ASTM B-209 "Aluminum Sheeting and Plating". 2. ASTM B-210 "Drawn Seamless Tubing". 3. ASTM B-211 "Aluminum Bar, Rod and Wire". 4. ASTM B-221 "Extruded Aluminum Bars, Rods, Wires and Tubes". 5. ASTM B-241 "Seamless Aluminum Pipe". 6. ASTM B-247 "Aluminum Die Forgings". 7. ASTM B-233 "Allowed Levels of Impurities in Aluminum and its Alloys". 8. ASTM B-308 "Aluminum 6061 Standard Structural Profiles".

C. AISC “Manual of Steel Construction”, Fourteenth Edition.

D. ASTM A-36 “Specifications for Structural Steel”, latest edition.

E. ASTM A-123 “Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating of Iron and Steel Products”, latest edition.

F. ASTM A-569 “Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality”, 1991.

G. ASTM A-780 “Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings”, latest edition.

H. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, latest edition.

I. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”, latest edition.

J. AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification For High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses without permanent deformation of assembly or components including loads due to:

1. Dead load. 2. Gravity and lateral live loads, as specified in the International Building Code (IBC),

2015 Edition for:

a. Snow. b. Wind. c. Seismic.

3. Vibration due to thermal and structural movement and wind. 4. Weakening of fasteners, attachments, welds and other components.

B. Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change in ambient and surface temperature of 120 degrees F. and designed to prevent:

1. Buckling. 2. Opening of joints. 3. Overstressing of components:


a. Thermal stresses. b. Framing member transferred stresses resulting from:

1.) Thermal movement. 2.) Structural movement.

4. Other detrimental effects on building support structure or metal fabrications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340.

1. Product Data: Fabricators technical and descriptive data for products used in metal fabrications, including:

a. Adhesive anchorage systems. b. Galvanized finishes. c. Painting procedures and finishes.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Overall plan showing location of all metal fabrication components, 1/8" per foot minimum scale.

b. Dimensioned plans, elevations and sections of each fabrication, 1/2" per foot minimum scale.

c. Large scale details drawn at 1 1/2" per foot minimum scale illustrating:

1.) Dimensioned profiles of components including primary and secondary members.

2.) Dimensioned supporting components as assembled and mechanically fastened to join metal fabrications to building support systems.

3.) Indicated connection requirements at supporting building structures including breaks required to prevent electrolysis between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.

d. Provide unit dimensions relating metal fabrications to supporting and adjoining structures and other construction.

e. Illustrate fabrication and erection techniques to be implemented for each metal fabrication assembly indicated.

3. Samples:

a. Fabricator's color charts showing full range of colors available for shop finishing aluminum metal fabrications for initial selection process.

b. Actual components representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Structural Calculations:

1. Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads including dead, live and thermal movement on fabricated structural metal fabrication assemblies.

a. Contractor shall obtain design loads and shop drawings from manufactured sunshade and canopy structures for use by fabricator to design aluminum plate structural support brackets.

b. Refer to Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies for additional submittals requirements for sunshade and canopy structures.

2. Structural analysis and design calculations for structural components and metal fabrication assemblies shall be sealed and signed by a professional structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida.



A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. NOMMA “Guideline 1 – Joint Finishes”, December 1994.

C. AWS “Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification”, 1994.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A386 – Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Assembled Steel Products.

E. SSPC “Steel Structures Painting Manual”, Volume 11, Sixth Edition.

F. Shop Prime Coating:

1. Zinc Dust Zinc Oxide for galvanized surfaces. 2. Paint, Oil; Iron Oxide, ready mixed, red and brown.

G. High Performance Organic Coating: High performance coatings for exterior aluminum components and fabrications shall comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification For High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992 for cleaning, preparation and finishing.

H. Aluminum Design Manual, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).

I. Specifications for Aluminum Structures, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).

J. Manual of Steel Construction, American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700, Chicago, IL 60601-1802


A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of existing structure and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements.

2. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions and allow for trimming and fitting.


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

1. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.


3. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. 4. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or

damage to members or supporting structures. 5. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty in accordance with Section 01700, Project Closeout.

B. Provide a written warranty, signed by the fabricator, agreeing to repair or replace paint finishes found to be defective.

1. Paint finish defects are defined as peeling, chipping, chalking, fading, abnormal aging or deterioration.

2. Warranty period for paint finishes shall be 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes.

1. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2. Do not use steel sheet with variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.

B. Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A-36; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A-500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A-501; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

D. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported members, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Threaded Rods: Threaded galvanized rod, A-36 steel, with washers, nuts and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

F. Steel Bolts: Threaded end with head, ASTM A-307, Grade A, with washers, nuts and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

2.2 NON-FERROUS METALS

A. Structural Aluminum Properties: Provide extruded structural aluminum shapes as indicated meeting ASTM 6061-T6/T651.

B. Aluminum Plate: Bare aluminum complying with AMS-QQ-A 250/11, ASTM B-209 and the following properties:

1. Ultimate tensile strength: 45,000 psi. 2. Minimum yield strength: 40,000 psi. 3. Modulus of elasticity: 10 x 106.


2.3 FASTENERS

A. Provide the same basic metal and alloy being fastened or 300 series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated and required by design loading.

1. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 2. Use types and sizes as indicated and to suit installation conditions. 3. Provide flat head Phillips, Torx or Allen type screws in matching color for exposed

fasteners unless otherwise indicated for joining fabricated components. 4. Provide zinc-coated or stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into

exterior walls.

B. Select fasteners for the type, grade, class required and as indicated.

C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A-307, Grade A.

D. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

E. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.

F. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-11.

G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

H. Drill-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.

I. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

1. Powers Fasteners – Pure110+

J. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

K. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.

L. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

M. Fixed Sunshade Bracket Bolts: 5/8" diameter, stainless steel hollo-bolt with washer by Lindapter.

2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty loading applications of type specified in this section.

B. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.


C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Nonshrink Metallic Grouts:

a. “Metox RM”; Chem-Masters Corp. b. “Hi Mod Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. c. “Embeco 885 and 636”; Master Builders. d. “Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC”; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord

Chemical Products, Inc. e. “Stonecrete MGI”; Stonhard, Inc.

2. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:

a. Euco N-S Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. b. “Kemset”; Chem-Masters Corp. c. “Masterflow 713”; Master Builders. d. “Sealtight 588 Grout”; W.R. Meadows, Inc. e. “Sonogrout”; Sonneborn Building Products Div. Rexnord Chemical Products,

Inc.

2.5 GALVANIZING, PRIMING AND PAINT

A. Ferrous Metals:

1. Galvanizing for Ferrous Metal: All ferrous metal indicated to be galvanized shall receive coatings by hot dipped process in compliance with ASTM A-123, Standard Specifications for Zinc Coatings (Hot Dipped Galvanized) on Iron and Steel Products.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.

3. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645 and selected for:

a. Good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion. b. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. c. Capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.

4. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint-12 except containing no asbestos fibers.

B. Non-ferrous Metals:

1. Shop Primer for Non-ferrous Metal: Fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645 and selected for:

a. Superior resistance to atmospheric corrosion. b. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. c. Compatibility to provide a sound foundation for shop applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.

2. Finish Paint for Non-ferrous Metal: Provide high performance organic coating for aluminum fabrications, connections and components used for construction of the sunshade and canopy brackets and awning framing structures complying with AAMA 605.2.


a. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.

b. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Provide clear fluorocarbon topcoat with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight per AAMA 605.2.

d. Color shall be dark bronze to match anodic finish on aluminum doors and storefront systems as indicated.

3. Fabricator shall furnish non-conductive separation products as recommended to prevent electrolysis at connection joints between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Construct metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.

1. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.

2. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and over stressing of welds and fasteners.

1. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

2. Temperature Change (Range): 100E F (55.5E C).

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly, accurately and remove burrs.

1. Perform thermal cutting by machine. 2. Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated and form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

G. Weld connections, corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Plane thermally cut ends and edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Steel and AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum.

2. Fabricate connections by welding members as indicated and in compliance with AWS D1.2 welding procedure tolerances for appearance and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

a. Joint type: Pre-tensioned.


3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing.

4. Contour of welded surface shall match those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible.

1. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated:

1. Coordinate with supporting structure. 2. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended

use.

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, rods, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and anchoring metal or wood to concrete, masonry, steel, or other structures.

B. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

C. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.

D. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, furnish steel washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections or steel connections.

2.8 COLUMN BASE ANCHORAGES, LEDGER ANGLES AND BRACE CHANNELS

A. Plate anchorage:

1. Anchorage plates shall be fabricated from A36 steel plate in thickness and size indicated to weld ledger angles and ledger support angles to plates mounted to face of legs of existing precast concrete columns:

a. Thickness: ½-inch. b. Size: 7 ½-inches x 9-inches. c. Quantity: 2 plates per connection.

2. Anchorage plates shall be fabricated from A36 steel plate in thickness and size indicated to weld bracing channels to plates mounted to face of legs of existing precast concrete columns:


a. Thickness: ½-inch. b. Size: 6-inches x 9-inches. c. Quantity: 2 plates per connection.

3. Through-bolts shall be 5/8-inch diameter, A36 threaded rods, 2 rods per connection complete with heavy-duty washers and nuts each end.

B. Ledger angles:

1. Ledger angles shall be 5” x 3” x 5/16” structural steel angles with long leg vertical welded to edges of anchorage plates as indicated.

a. On larger column enclosures ledger angles shall be supported by additional cantilevered 5” x 3” x 5/16” support angles with long leg vertical welded to edges of anchorage plates as indicated.

b. Long leg of ledger angles shall then be welded to ends of cantilever support angles as indicated.

c. All ledger angles shall be mitered at outside corners and butt welded to form a rigid, square perimeter upon which to construct cold-formed metal stud framing.

2. Accurately fabricate components for field anchorage to existing supporting precast concrete columns and for attaching new cold-formed metal framing.

C. Bracing channels:

1. Bracing channels shall be C3 x 6 structural steel welded to edges of anchorage plates as indicated.

2. Accurately fabricate components for field anchorage to existing supporting precast concrete columns and for attaching new cold-formed metal framing.

D. Furnish specified plates, through-bolts, washers, nuts, ledger angles, leger support angles and bracing channels as indicated in galvanized finish for field installation to existing precast columns.

2.9 ALUMINUM SUNSHADE AND CANOPY BRACKETS

A. Bracket materials:

1. Bracket flanges shall be fabricated from aluminum plate material in thickness and sizes indicated, in the following configurations, to support manufactured sunshades and canopies furnished under Section 10 71 00, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies:

a. T-shaped brackets used as intermediate support for pairs of manufactured outrigger members indicated.

b. L-shaped brackets used as end support for single member manufactured outriggers indicated.

2. Brackets shall be fabricated with flanges at right angles to each other, whether T-shaped or L-shaped, with joints welded per AWS requirements using weld types and sizes indicated.

3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces in preparation for finish coating.

4. Materials shall be selected to comply with requirements to meet specified building Code loading criteria.

5. Accurately fabricate aluminum bracket components for field anchorage to supporting building elements and for attaching manufactured aluminum outriggers.


6. Space brackets on supporting building elements according to manufactured

outrigger spacing and in compliance with specified performance criteria and as indicated.

B. Bracket attachments:

1. Provide 6-bolt hole pattern as indicated for mechanically attaching brackets to supporting building spandrel elements.

a. Punch or drill bolt holes in back flange of bracket to receive stainless steel threaded rod through-bolts indicated allowing 1/16" clearance between bolt and sides of hole (1/8" overall diameter larger than rod diameter).

b. Ensure bolt holes are free of burrs and roughness to allow easy field marking, drilling and installation of through-bolts to supporting building spandrel elements.

c. Furnish steel backer plate for back side of precast concrete spandrel fascia.

1.) Thickness: ½-inch. 2.) Size: 6-inches x 12-inches. 3.) Quantity: 1 plates per bracket attachment.

2. Provide 4-bolt hole pattern as indicated for mechanically attaching aluminum outriggers manufactured under Section 10711 to the outstanding leg of brackets.

a. Punch or drill bolt holes in outstanding flange leg of bracket to receive stainless steel outrigger mounting bolts indicated allowing 1/16" clearance between bolt and sides of hole (1/8" overall diameter larger than bolt diameter).

b. Ensure bolt holes are free of burrs and roughness to allow easy field marking, drilling and installation of bolts to supporting building elements.

C. Furnish 5/8-inch stainless steel threaded rod through bolts, 6 rods per bracket, complete with heavy duty stainless steel washers and nuts each end.

D. Clean, prepare and provide high performance organic coating on all components complying with AAMA 605.2.

E. Package finished sunshade and canopy bracket fabrications for shipping to prevent damage to finishes and repair or replace damaged finishes immediately upon receipt at job site to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide 3/8-inch threaded rod anchors for adhesive anchorage into existing precast concrete spandrel and wall panels to attach horizontal wood furring strips indicated.

1. Embedment: 3-inch minimum. 2. Projection: As indicated to provide clearance for back washer and nut, fluted

spandrel and board formed wall panel clearances and 2 x furring strips to attain offsets from precast members to finish face of EIFS.

B. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges.

D. Use concealed field splices wherever possible.

E. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.


2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process compliance with the following requirements:

1. ASTM A-153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A-123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel

products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP3 “Commercial Blast Cleaning.” 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 “Power Tool Cleaning.”

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 “Paint Application Specification No. 1” for shop painting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including sleeve anchors, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.

B. Shop fabricate to minimize field welding in as much as possible:

1. Field measure existing precast concrete columns. 2. Shop fabricate ledger angles and ledger support angles to the greatest extent

possible leaving one side to be field welded wherever possible.

C. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site so that progress of work can be maintained without delay.

D. Drill holes where required in concrete or masonry for anchorages as indicated or as recommended by anchor manufacturer for application and to resist applied forces.


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction.

B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:

1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications.


2. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

2. Do no weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGES, LEDGER ANGLES AND BRACE CHANNELS

A. Contractor shall field measure existing precast concrete columns so that fabrication can begin early on anchorage plates, ledger angles and bracing channels necessary to support cold-formed metal studs for column bases and enclosures.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of all dimensions to determine anchorage plate, ledger angle and brace channel placement and connections to supporting elements.

2. Carefully mark field verified dimensions for through-bolt centerlines on supporting leg of precast concrete columns.

3. Temporarily place brackets in precise vertical and horizontal alignment at previously determined locations and use bracket back plate as template to transfer bolt hole locations onto precast elements.

B. After accurately marking threaded rod through-bolt locations and verifying for accuracy, drill holes in supporting elements.

1. Confirm bolt sizes and ensure that holes are accurately drilled, perpendicular to the face of the supporting element for bolt diameters to be used for connections.

a. Holes may be oversized to facilitate through-bolt installation and to miss any reinforcing steel found to conflict with installation.

b. After drilling thoroughly clean holes in precast to receive through-bolts and slide through outstanding legs of precast concrete columns.

2. Install anchorage plates over through-bolts and adjust positioning of bolts to align with holes in plates.

3. After proper positioning threaded rod through-bolts shall be permanently anchored into legs of concrete using specified adhesive, pressure applied to ensure filling of all voids around circumference of bolts from end to end of holes.

C. Mount anchorage plates as indicated:

1. Install anchorage plates over ends of threaded rods in proper position to receive subsequent ledger angles, ledger support angles and bracing channels.


2. Ensure that outside edges of plates are flush with outside faces of column legs. 3. Install heavy-duty washers, nuts and ensure that bolts and nuts are torqued to

optimum capacity to resist specified loading.

D. Install ledger angles, ledger support angles and channel bracing as indicated extending flush with face of precast concrete column and edges of anchorage plates to outside perimeter of column base rough framing.

1. Weld ledger angles, ledger support angles and channel braces as indicated to edges of anchorage plates.

2. Apply galvanized touchup paint in 2-coats on all welded connections and wherever galvanized steel finishes are damaged prior to installation of cold-formed metal.

E. Inspect and protect completed assemblies for installation of other work and until final acceptance.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SUNSHADE AND CANOPY BRACKETS

A. Contractor shall obtain shop drawings for manufactured sunshades and canopies early in Project so that outrigger locations and spacing to coordinate bracket placement locations with respect to supporting building spandrel elements.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of all dimensions to determine bracket placement and connections to supporting elements.

2. Carefully mark field verified dimensions for outrigger centerlines on each supporting spandrel element.

3. Temporarily place brackets in precise vertical and horizontal alignment at previously determined locations and use bracket back plate as template to transfer bolt hole locations onto spandrels to mark centerline of each threaded rod through-bolt hole.

B. Once bolt holes are marked and verified for accuracy, drill holes through supporting elements.

1. Confirm stainless steel through-bolt sizes and ensure that holes are accurately drilled, perpendicular to the face of the supporting element for bolt diameters to be used for connections.

a. Holes may be oversized to facilitate through-bolt installation and to miss any reinforcing steel found to conflict with installation.

b. After drilling thoroughly clean holes in precast to receive through-bolts and slide through outstanding legs of precast concrete columns.

2. Install backer plates over through-bolts on inside face of precast concrete spandrel fascia and adjust positioning of bolts to align with holes in plates.

3. Dry fit aluminum outrigger bracket assembly over through-bolts on exterior face and install shims to level and plumb outrigger brackets in alignment with each other and subsequently installed outriggers to ensure spacing of fascia tube is parallel to face of new EIFS spandrel finish above openings.

4. Threaded rod through-bolts shall be permanently anchored into precast concrete spandrel panels after proper positioning and bracket shimming using specified adhesive, pressure applied to ensure filling of all voids around circumference of bolts from end to end of holes.

C. Mount sunshade and canopy support brackets as indicated:

1. Install manufacturer's recommended non-conduction bond breaker separation between back side of bracket back flange and concrete to prevent electrolitic reactions between dissimilar materials.


2. Mount all bracket plates to structural support spandrel elements, shim solid and in alignment and ensure that bolts and nuts are torqued to optimum capacity to resist specified loading.

3. Pack non-shrink, non-metallic grout between back of outrigger bracket and face of precast concrete spandrel panel using grout bag under pressure to ensure well compacted, continuous plate bedding without voids in grout material.

D. Fit bracket connections properly aligned and positioned for proper projection of outstanding flange past face of new EIFS exterior wall finishes and to accurately attached outriggers specified under Section 10711.

E. Inspect and protect completed assemblies, including prefinished brackets, for installation of other work and until final acceptance.

3.5 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with that of other Section for proper field measurements and opening sizes.

1. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry, for 2 x furring attached to precast concrete walls and spandrels using threaded rod adhesive anchors as indicted with 3-inch minimum embedment into existing concrete.

2. Refer to Division 16, Electrical for lighting that is associated with columns.

B. Locate loose threaded rod anchors as indicated and in proper locations with clearances to ensure that adjustments can be made in vertical and horizontal planes of rough carpentry items.

1. Embed threaded rod anchors in adhesive using specified adhesive anchoring system.

2. Adjust vertical and horizontal plane positioning of each row of 2 x furring prior to fixing nuts on either side of wood members.

3. Countersink outside washers and nuts into face of wood furring members to allow proper planning of fiberglass reinforced gypsum sheathing.

4. After all adjustments have been made cut threaded rod anchors off flush with outside face of 2 x furring and ping both inside and outside threads of anchor rods to prevent nuts from loosening.

C. Coat surfaces of steel at field modifications or welds and wherever shop coating has been damaged with touch-up primer of galvanized repair paint in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared to receive finishes as specified.

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.

END 05500.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 –ROUGH CARPENTRY

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All performance rated and non-rated wood construction panels. b. All wood wall furring over existing precast concrete wall and spandrel panels

to receive new sheathing and finishes. c. All wood roof edge blocking, nailers, grounds and supports. d. All wood blocking for sign supports, parapet roof drains, lambs tongue

spillouts and other items to be mounted over or through face of EIFS after installation of wall finishes.

e. Roof deck blocking for cold formed metal framing indicated. f. Miscellaneous blocking for supporting or bracing construction elements. g. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry. h. All labor to complete installation of normal rough carpentry items furnished

under this and other Sections of the Specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04850 – Natural Thin Veneer Stone. 4. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 7. Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 8. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal.


A. Lumber grading rules and wood species to conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70; Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished under this section.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc.(NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer's Association (NHPMA).

B. Plywood grading rules:

1. Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PSI-66.

C. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade marks:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.


a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood - Appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood Association.

a. Type, grade, class and identification index. b. Inspection and testing agency mark.


A. Deliver materials with grade marks and labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials under cover and in dry location in accord with Section 01620.

1. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. 2. Stack lumber and plywood to provide for air circulation within and around stacks

and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 3. Store rigid foam core insulated sheathing panels flat in weatherproof storage shed. 4. Take special precautions to place spacers between each bundle of lumber and

plywood that has been pressure treated with waterborne chemicals to facilitate air circulation.

1.5 WORKMANSHIP QUALITY

A. Workmanship for rough carpentry shall be in accordance with requirements of National Lumber Manufacturer's Association.

1. Cut members square on bearings and fit closely. 2. Set accurately to lines, levels and plumb. 3. Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections. 4. Provide expansion anchors, sleeve anchors and masonry screw anchors for

fastening into concrete or masonry substrates.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Lumber:

1. Dimensions:

a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by American

Lumber Standards Committee and rules writing agencies.

2. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 15% maximum at time of installation. 3. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S) unless specified otherwise. 4. All framing lumber and blocking, 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches to 12 inches

wide, Douglas Fir/Larch or Southern Pine:

a. Economy grade shall not be used. b. Plates, blocking, bracing, bulk heads, nailers, and general utility purposes:

Construction grade or better. c. Strength of materials:


1.) Light framing/blocking, “Construction” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 2” to 4” wide.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1250 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,500,000 psi. c) Compression ** to grain (Fc): 1300 psi.

2.) Structural framing, “No. 2” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 5” and wider.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1500 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,600,000 psi. c) Compression ** to grain (Fc): 1200 psi.

B. Plywood:

1. Concealed APA performance rated wall sheathing construction panels at exterior face of vertical cold-formed metal framing members including, but not limited to column bases, column enclosures, fascia framing and elsewhere:

a. Thickness: 15/32”. b. Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1. c. Span rating: 32/16. d. Edge configuration: Square.

2. Concealed APA performance rated wall sheathing construction panels at exterior face of horizontal cold-formed metal framing members including, but not limited to column bases, fascia roof framing and elsewhere:


3. Miscellaneous APA performance rated construction panels not specifically called out above:


2.2 BOARDS

A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-15). 2. Provide Western Red Cedar, “C Select/A all Heart” grade per WWPA rules for all

exposed installations.

B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-19). 2. Provide the following species and grades:

a. Redwood “Construction Common” per RIS rules. b. Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules. c. Any species graded “Construction Boards” or “No. 3 Common” per WCLIB or

WWPA rules. d. Redwood “Merchantable” per RIS rules.


e. Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules. f. Any species graded “Standard” or “No. 3 Common Boards” per WCLIB or

WWPA rules.

C. Board Sizes: Provide nominal or actual sizes as indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND HARDWARE

A. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry items shall be provided.

B. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hot-dipped galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum for exterior locations and high humidity locations; size and type to suit application; staples shall not be used for fastening wood structurally.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Medium carbon-steel; sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations and high humidity locations.

D. Expansion Type Anchors: Plastic or non-ferrous metal type plug inserts designed to expand when screw and lag bolt type anchors are secured shall be used for fastening light-duty installations to solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

E. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

F. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

G. Expansion Sleeve Type Anchors: High carbon or stainless steel wedge type expansion core anchor with nut and washer designed to fasten into concrete and conforming to Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1 shall be used for fastening heavy-duty installations into concrete substrates.

H. Construction Panel Clips: Provide 20 gauge, galvanized sheathing clips with 40/20 span rating, designed to support edges of roof sheathing, sized to specified panel thickness.

3 EXECUTION


A. Blocking and all other carpentry items shall be laid out as called for by drawings and shall be cut and fitted as necessitated by conditions encountered.

B. All work shall be plumbed, leveled and braced with sufficient nails, spikes, bolts, etc., to ensure rigidity.

1. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.

2. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

C. Use galvanized wire nails, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side with be exposed.


2. Make tight connections between members. 3. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.

D. All pieces of wood or other carpentry material with a defect or defects that prevent it from serving its intended purpose satisfactorily, including crooked, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective material, even if within the limits of grade specified, will be rejected and shall be replaced with an acceptable piece.

E. Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact requirements, dimensions and as detailed since installation of rough carpentry materials constitutes acceptance of surface conditions.

F. Frame wood members to a close fit.

1. Set accurately to required lines and levels and secure rigidly in place in accordance with details.

2. Cut and fit framing, blocking, and furring to accommodate other work as required.

G. Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and framing with structural steel fabricator to ensure the holes are properly punched at designated or adequate spacing to support and attach rough carpentry items.

H. Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and plating with requirements for

setting anchor bolts specified under Section 05500, Metal Fabrications and installed under Sections 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, PLATES, NAILERS, GROUNDS AND SUPPORTS

A. Blocking shall be sizes and shapes indicated on details and as required by conditions encountered.

B. Install wood blocking, plates, nailers, grounds and supports where shown and where required for attachment of other work.

1. Provide and form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached.

2. Coordinate location with other work involved in systems.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.

1. Countersink screw anchors, bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Hooked anchor bolts shall be used as indicated to attach wood plates to concrete or masonry structure.

3. Provide wedge type sleeve anchors only where indicated or to attach miscellaneous blocking and plating to concrete or masonry.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, “APA Design/Construction Guide – Residential & Commercial,” for types of construction panels and application indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Parapet and Fascia Wall Sheathing: #10 TEK screws to steel framing and blocking.


a. Vertical sheathing:

1.) 8-inch centers in field of panels. 2.) 6-inch centers at all panel edges.

b. Horizontal sheathing:

1.) 12-inch centers in field of panels. 2.) 8-inch centers at all panel edges.

2. Backing Panels: #10 TEK screws to steel framing.

a. Provide wood or light gauge steel angle support for backing panels securely fastened to sides of light gauge metal framing with screws to allow backing panels to nest between studs.

b. Fasten backer panels to support at edges using screws at maximum spacing of 8” centers or as necessary to support applied loads.

3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Remove from site all rubbish, debris and packaging produced by operations and leave site in a "broom-clean" condition.

B. Adjust all working items to fit snugly yet work freely.

C. Confirm blocking heights and locations and make adjustments as required for proper installation of other items of work.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed items of other trades from damage during construction.

B. Protect completed work from damage until project is completed and accepted.

END 06100.

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06300 – FIRE RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT

FIRE RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT 06300-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fire retardant pressure treatment for all dimension lumber. b. Fire retardant pressure treatment for all plywood indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

2. ASTM A653 / A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM D3201 Standard Test Method for Hygroscopic Properties of Fire-Retardant Wood and Wood-Base Products.

4. ASTM D5516 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures.

5. ASTM D5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber.

6. ASTM D6305 Standard Practice for Calculating Bending Strength Design Adjustment Factors for Fire retardant Treated Plywood Roof Sheathing.

7. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. American Wood-Protection Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA E12 Standard method of determining the corrosion of metal in contact with wood.

2. AWPA P17 Fire Retardant Formulations. 3. AWPA P23 Standard for Chromated Copper Arsenate Type C (CCA-C). 4. AWPA P25 - Standard for Inorganic Boron (SBX). 5. AWPA P26 - Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type A (ACQ-A). 6. AWPA P27 - Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type B (ACQ-B). 7. AWPA P28 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type C (ACQ-C). 8. AWPA P29 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type D (ACQ-D). 9. AWPA P47 - Standard for DCOI/Imidacloprid/Stabilizer, Waterborne (EL2). 10. AWPA P50 Standard for Fire Retardant FR-2 (FR-2). 11. AWPA T1 - Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard. 12. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.


C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 255 Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 723 Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's instructions for use, including requirements for storage, cutting, and finishing.

C. Fire-Retardant Treatment Certification: Treating plant's certification of compliance with specified requirements.


A. Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications: Wood treatment plant experienced in performing work of this section.

1. Provide current licensing documentation from nationally recognized company. 2. Provide written certification of plant’s qualifications and quality control procedures.

B. Source Quality: Obtain treated wood products from a single approved source.

C. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Mark each piece of plywood and lumber to show compliance with specified standards.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment which complies with the following regulatory requirements:

1. International Building Code (IBC). 2. International Code Council Evaluation Service ICC-ES ESR 2645.

E. Independent Third Party Inspection:

1. Provide written documentation of regular plant inspections by third party laboratory or responsible party.

F. Kiln Dry after Treatment (KDAT): Provide kiln dry material as indicated or required.

1. Kiln dry after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber in accordance with AWPA T1, Section 7 - Drying After Treatment (lumber).

2. Kiln dry after treatment to 15 percent for plywood in accordance with AWPA T1, Section F: Pressure treated composites (3c) kiln drying after treatment.


A. Store and protect wood products in accordance with Section 01620.

B. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 40-year transferable limited warranty for pressure-treated wood.


B. Warranty shall not restrict AAFES from exercising rights under this Contract and shall protect AAFES against defects in fire retardant treatment of wood products including, but not limited to:

1. Deterioration of plywood used in conjunction with roofing materials subjected to normal heat and weather conditions common to the location of this Project.

2. Deterioration of fasteners, cold-formed metal framing or other ferrous metals that come into contact with products furnished under this Section.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

Viance 200 E. Woodlawn Rd. Suite 350 Charlotte, NC 28217 Phone: 800-421-8661 Email: [email protected]

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Dimension Lumber: As specified in Section 06100.

B. Construction Panels: As specified in Section 06100.

C. Fasteners In Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Use only code approved fasteners as specified in ICC-ES ESR 2645.

2.3 FIRE RETARDANT PRESSURE TREATMENT OF LUMBER AND PLYWOOD

A. Fire retardant treatment for wood blocking, sheathing and finish paneling:

1. Lumber: Comply with AWPA U1 UCFA, Type A or ICC-ES ESR 2645. 2. Plywood: Comply with AWPA U1, UCFA, Type A or ICC-ES ESR 2645. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: UL FR-S rating; or flame spread and smoke

developed ratings of 25 or less in a test of 30 minutes' duration in accordance with IBC section 2303.2.

4. Treatment: D-Blaze FRT as manufactured by Viance. 5. Kiln dry after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber and 15

percent for plywood. 6. Treat wood used for the following applications:

a. Roof edge and other miscellaneous blocking. b. Wall sheathing at existing structural ornamental arched trusses indicated and

other locations. c. Wall paneling used as finish in areas indicated d. Concealed and exposed backing panels for attaching finish items, fixtures,

accessories and equipment to walls.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wood Blocking: Comply with installation requirements in Section 06100.


B. Construction Panels: Comply with installation requirements in Section 06100.

C. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood:

1. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

2. End cuts and drilling are permitted. 3. Do not rip or mill lumber after fire-retardant treatment.

3.2 COMPLETION

A. All field cuts and holes in fire retardant treated materials shall be field treated with two brush coats of same preservative used in pressure treatment.

B. Remove from site all extra materials, rubbish, debris and packaging.

END 06300.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB

EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM – CLASS PB 07240-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fiberglass faced gypsum substrate/sheathing panels over metal stud framing systems.

b. Exterior insulation and finish system including the following:

1.) Air/weather barrier system. 2.) Base coat and adhesive, including trowel applied drainage plane. 3.) Expanded polystyrene insulation board. 4.) Expanded polystyrene shapes and features for detailing indicated. 5.) Back wrapping of all polystyrene insulation board edges where

meeting dissimilar materials. 6.) Fiber reinforcing mesh. 7.) Exterior finish. 8.) Accessory components, drainage strips, sealants, control joints and

other items necessary for complete installation of the exterior insulation and finish system.

c. Provision of qualified, manufacturer certified field inspector and assistance in inspecting installation of EIFS components at specified intervals to ensure proper and warranted system installation in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 6. Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 7. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 8. Section 07920 – Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of the following:

1. Approved substrate. 2. Moisture and air protection barrier. 3. Trowel applied drainage plane adhesive under layer of rigid board insulation. 4. Outer layer composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly

to board insulation. 5. Textured protective finish coat.


B. These assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated.

C. Designation PB for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this Section is based on the classification developed by the Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association (EIMA).

D. System in this Section refers to Class PB exterior insulation and finish systems.

E. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems.

F. An R-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value) designates thermal resistivity of the insulation board.

1. Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.

2. Thermal resistivity (R-value) is expressed by the temperature difference between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through 1 square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide system complying with the following performance requirements:

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.

2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.

3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84.

b. Identity materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing products for system indicated and with at least 10 years successful experience in applications similar to that required for this project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer that is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for installation of systems indicated.

C. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components.


2. System selected shall be compatible with intended design and performance characteristics.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340:

1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each component of exterior insulation and finish system and related products specified under this Section.

2. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including elevation(s), section(s), details of components including back wrapping, flashing tape and drainage strips, joint locations between system and construction and attachments to construction behind system.

3. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes:

a. E.I.F.S. manufacturer's standard color charts and small-scale samples indicating textural choices available, three (3) originals.

b. Fiberglass faced gypsum sheathing/substrate, 6-inch by 12-inch panel. c. Drainage strip, 6-inch long piece.

4. Samples for Verification Purposes: Three (3) Samples, 2 foot square, for each finish, color, and texture selected.

a. Prepare verification samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.

b. Incorporate within each sample a typical edge joint filled with sealant of color as selected by Architect and a typical back wrapped edge.

B. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.

1. Product test reports for system prepared by a qualified independent testing laboratory within the last 3 years certifying and interpreting test results relative to system's compliance with requirements for fire performance characteristics, bond integrity, and material properties.

2. Sealant compatibility and test report from sealant manufacturer certifying that materials forming joint substrates of system have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

a. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of results relative to sealant performance.

b. Provide recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.


A. In accordance with Section 01620 and other requirements below.

B. Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact.

C. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic and other causes.

D. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.



A. Environmental Conditions:

1. Do not install system when ambient outdoor temperatures are 40 degrees F or below or when overnight temperatures are scheduled to fall below that limit.

2. Temporary protection and heat may by provided to sustain a temperature above 40 degrees F. if temperatures are 40 degrees F. and falling.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees (4 degrees C.) during installation of wet materials and for 24 hours after installation or longer to allow them to become thoroughly dry and weather resistant.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installation of system with related work specified in other sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including joint sealers, are protected against damage from weather, aging, corrosion, or other causes.

B. Install finish materials in coordination with installation of elastomeric coating system for continuity of finishes.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer: Furnish a written manufacturer's warranty for a period of seven (7) years for defects in materials.

B. Repairs or replacement shall be done at no cost to AAFES, DeCA or Tyndall AFB.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class PB System of one of the following:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. P.O. Box 1014 West Warwick, RI 02893 (800) 556-7752 2. Senergy Inc. 1367 Elmwood Ave. Cranston, RI 02910 (800) 221-9255 3. Sto Industries P.O. Box 44609 Atlanta, GA 30336 (800) 221-2397

2.2 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS:

Manufacturer PRODUCT

Dryvit “Outsulation Plus" Senergy “Senerflex X-tra Stop" Sto “Classic Next System"


2.3 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide substrate, board insulation, reinforcing fabric, base and finish coat materials, adhesives, anchors, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer.

B. Fiberglass faced gypsum substrate/sheathing panels: Paperless, mold-resistant, inorganic, exterior gypsum panel sheathing designed as substrate behind permanent building cladding systems.

1. Product: DensGlass Gold as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation and as approved by system manufacturer.

2. Size: 1/2-inch thick x 4 feet wide x 8, 9 or 10 feet in length.

C. Air/Weather Resistive Barrier: A Class I vaper retarder, spray version, including listed accessory items as recommended and approved by the system manufacturer.

1. Fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Polyethylene backed flashing tape with rubberized asphalt adhesive. 3. Water-based flashing tape surface conditioner. 4. Accessory adhesives. 5. Corrugated plastic drainage strip. 6. Other miscellaneous accessories required by manufacturer for complete substrate

preparation.

D. Adhesive for Application of Insulation:

1. System manufacturer’s standard formulation designed for indicated use and compatible with substrate.

2. Adhesive shall be job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C-150, Type 1 and compatible with polymer based adhesive specified for base coat.

E. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation:

1. Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C-578 for Type 1.

2. Insulation shall be approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness, other dimensional tolerances and the following:

a. Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not less than 6 weeks or by another method approved by system manufacturer that produces equivalent results.

b. Provide insulation in boards not less than 2 feet x 4 feet and in thickness indicated, but not less that that allowed by system manufacturer.

c. Provide accurately cut polystyrene shapes and features for detailing indicated.

F. Reinforcing Fabric: System shall be constructed with two (2) layers of balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multi-end strands with tensile strength of not less than 145 lbs. and 150 lbs. in warp and fill directions, respectively, per ASTM D-1682 and complying with ASTM D-578, and of the following minimum weight:

1. First layer: Standard duty reinforcing mesh, 4.30 oz. per sq. yd. minimum. 2. Second layer: Standard duty reinforcing mesh, 4.30 oz. per sq. yd. minimum. 3. Detailing mesh: Standard duty reinforcing mesh (short rolls), 4.30 oz. per sq. yd.


G. Base Coat Materials:

1. System manufacturer's standard, job mixed formulation of Portland cement complying with ASTM C-150, Type I.

2. Cement shall be of natural color and combined with system manufacturer’s standard polymer-based adhesive designed for use indicated.

H. Finish Coat Materials:

1. System manufacturer's standard factory mixed formulation of polymer emulsion admixture, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles and fillers.

2. Provide color and texture of protective coating to comply with the following requirements:

a. Provide selections of three (3) separate colors made by Contracting Officer and or designated representative from manufacturer's full range of standard colors available for type of finish coat indicated.

b. Texture shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard sand texture finishes.

I. Water: Clean and potable.

J. Supplemental Anchorage:

1. Where recommended provide system manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fastener assemblies, complete with system manufacturer's standard washer attachments, selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated, capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board.

2. Fasteners shall be designed for attachment to metal studs complying with ASTM C 954.

2.4 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Sealant Product: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is listed and recommended by system manufacturer for use indicated.

1. Joint sealant shall be compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials.

2. Sealant shall be a multi-part, non-sag urethane composition complying with requirements of Section 07920, Sealants and Caulking.

B. Sealant Color: Provide color selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.5 MIXING

A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.

B. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer.

C. Mix materials in clean containers.

D. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard.


3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine sheathing and framed sub-substrates, with installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system.

B. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems.

B. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work.

C. Attach approved substrate products over wood sheathing and framing as indicated.

D. Prepare and clean sub-substrates to comply with system manufacturer’s requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

3.3 E.I.F.S. INSTALLATION

A. Comply with system manufacturer’s current published instructions for installation of system as applicable to type of substrate indicated.

B. Apply system manufacturer’s air/weather barrier system over approved substrate in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Adhesively attach insulation to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Treat exposed edges of insulation board, including those forming substrates of sealed joints within system or between system and other work, by encapsulation with base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish coat.

a. All edges of insulation that adjoin dissimilar materials or that are discontinuous shall be factory back wrapped with detail mesh embedded in adhesive.

b. At Contractor’s option, edges may be field back wrapped prior to adhering to substrate as follows:

1.) Detail mesh and adhesive shall be extended a minimum of 2 inches continuously along back surface of board.

2.) Spread adhesive on back and edge of board and embed detail mesh allowing free edge of mesh to drape over face of insulation.

3.) Edges shall receive coat of finish during finishing process or, if not accessible during finish process, prior to adhesion of insulation board to substrate.

c. Detail fabric shall be completely embedded and covered with adhesive. d. All edges shall receive finish coat. e. No exposed mesh or insulation shall be allowed. f. Exposed mesh or insulation board shall be grounds for rejection of entire

system.


2. Apply adhesive vertically to insulation by notched towel method in manner that results in adhesive coating entire surface of gypsum sheathing after insulation is placed against sheathing, unless system manufacturer instructions specify use of surface sealer in combination with ribbon and dab method.

3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally beginning first course from a level base line and working upwards.

4. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern and offset joints of insulation from joints in sheathing.

5. Interlock ends at internal and external corners where applicable. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards.

a. If gaps occur or cannot be avoided, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly. b. Insert insulation filler into gap without use of adhesive.

7. Install drainage strips and bottom edges where indicated or as required by manufacturer to ensure unobstructed pathway for unintended moisture to drain from behind system.

8. Where required and recommended install supplemental mechanical fasteners to ensure that insulation board is securely retained as follows:

a. Secure mechanical fasteners to framing members behind sheathed substrates so that they penetrate framing members 5/8 inch or more and recess flush with exterior surface of insulation board.

b. Space fasteners horizontally in line with framing members at approximately 16” to 24” centers and vertically not more that 16” on center.

9. Allow adhered, mechanically attached insulation to remain undisturbed for period prescribed by system manufacturer by not less that 24 hours, prior to beginning rasping and sanding insulation or application of base coat and reinforcing fabric.

10. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.

11. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated.

a. Coordinate detailed flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating.

b. Metal flashings are specified in Section 07600.

12. Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or required by system manufacturer.

13. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps of width needed between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces that produce joint widths indicated after encapsulation of joint substrates with base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish coat.

a. Embed strips of standard duty mesh in adhesive on sheathing or masonry surface at each joint leaving approximately 6 inches of strip hanging loose.

b. After application of insulation and during installation of base coat and initial layer of mesh, wrap loose ends of strips around edges of insulation to protect sides of joint.


14. Cut grooves, drips, rabbets, slopes and other features in outside face of insulation using hot wire knife and do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than one half the insulation thickness or 1/2 inch.

D. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by system manufacturer.

E. Fully embed base layer of reinforcing fabric of type indicated in wet base coat to produce wrinkle free installation with fabric continuous at corners and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. After initial base coat has cured apply a second base coat and subsequent layer of reinforcing fabric, of type indicated, in same manner as first application.

G. Apply finish coat over cured base coat in thickness specified by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved verification sample.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements of Division 7, Section 07920.

B. In addition to requirements of Section 07920, comply with "EIMA Joint Sealant Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems."

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove protective coatings from window and doorframes and any other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive protective coating.

B. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering and soiling of new exterior insulation and finish system.

C. Maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to installer and system manufacturer that ensures systems being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Inspector: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent inspector, certified by system manufacturer to perform on site quality control inspections to ensure that best practices are followed in substrate preparation and installation of components following this specification Section and manufacturer’s written installation instructions including, but not limited to the following general parts of the system:

1. Substrate preparation. 2. Drainage plane. 3. Component installation.

a. Back and edge wrapping with continuous embedment of mesh. b. Finishing edges of discontinuous back wrapped edges. c. Insulation attachment. d. Detailing insulation board.


e. Mesh embedment and base coat installation. f. Finish coat installation. g. Backer rod and sealant installation.

4. Certification that system will meet specified warranty.

B. Inspection Schedule: Perform in accordance with this specification Section and system manufacturer’s written installation instructions:

1. Inspect substrate preparation and drainage plane:

a. Fiberglass faced gypsum sheathing attachment and facer adhesion. b. Planer imperfections affecting plumb, straight and square component

installation. c. Air/weather barrier application. d. Drainage strip placement and attachment.

2. Inspect component installation:

a. Continuous embedment of reinforcing mesh on back (2”) and edges of insulation board prior to placement of insulation.

b. Finishing of discontinuous edges in inaccessible after insulation board installation.

c. Vertical notched trowel application of adhesive to ensure clear drainage plane.

d. Insulation embedment into adhesive. e. Detailing insulation board.

1.) Drip edges. 2.) Reveals. 3.) Banding.

f. Planer imperfections affecting plumb, straight and square finish installation. g. Mesh embedment and base coat installation. h. Finish coat installation. i. Back rod and sealant installation.

3. Record the following information on submitted test reports.

a. Date of inspection. b. Area or component inspected. c. Location of inspected area or component. d. Time of day. e. Outside air temperature (degrees F.). f. Observations:

1.) Details of proper installation techniques. 2.) Detail of improper installation methods observed.

4. Notifications:

1.) Immediately notify Contracting Officer and designated representative of defects or improprieties.

2.) Recommend corrective measures to Contracting Officer, designated representative and Contractor.

5. Inspection Frequency: Inspector shall be required to be on site a minimum of ten (10) half days (40-hours) over the course of the Project.

END 07240.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07536 – MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING (PATCHING ONLY)

MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING (PATCHING ONLY) 07536-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide modifications to two separate existing warranted multi-ply, built-up modified bitumen roofing with granular surface cap sheet roofing systems as shown and herein specified.

a. Remove existing construction:

1.) Assistance for testing existing base and parapet flashings for ACM. 2.) Base and parapet flashings. 3.) Cant strips. 4.) Parapet wall overflow scuppers and spillouts. 5.) Spud modified bitumen cap sheet and stepped layers of mulit-ply

roofing back from inside face of parapet and walls as indicated in preparation for new tie-in and patching.

6.) Roof insulation as necessary to establish tie-in and patching. 7.) Miscellaneous roof accessories as necessary for roof patching

installation.

b. Install new:

1.) Fill insulation for patching. 2.) Cant strips. 3.) Parapet wall overflow drains. 4.) PVC piping of drains to exterior of new finishes. 5.) Lambs tongue overflow drain terminations. 6.) Stepped patches to extend existing roofing to existing and new

construction with multi-ply layers of bitumen embedded roofing. 7.) Step patch granular surfaced modified bitumen cap sheet. 8.) Base and parapet wall flashings. 9.) Miscellaneous roof accessories necessary for roof patching

installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. 01010 – Project Summary. 2. 01045 – Cutting & Patching. 3. 01500 – Temporary Facilities & Controls. 4. 01700 – Project Closeout. 5. 01720 – Project Record Documents. 6. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 7. 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 8. 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 9. 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB. 10. 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 11. 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 12. 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.


B. Provided but specified elsewhere:

1. Refer to Section 01010, Project Summary for required base and parapet flashing testing for ACM and abatement, hauling and legal disposal of ACM flashing materials.

a. Proposal shall include separate line item cost for an Asbestos Inspector to sequentially inspect, sample, test and report on potential residual ACM from original roofing system base and parapet flashings as set forth in detail under Section 01010.

b. Proposal shall also include separate line item cost for abatement of residual base and parapet flashings left from original roof, assumed to be positive to contain ACM for bidding, and as set forth in detail under Section 01010.

c. Line item additional costs for abatement shall be credited back to AAFES should sampling and testing result in negative results for ACM materials as set forth in detail in Section 01010.

2. Selective demolition work related to roofing system components including, but not limited to roofing components, sheet metal and wood blocking is specified in Section 02070, Selective Demolition.

3. TPO membrane related to new column and entry fascia roof construction is specified in Section 07540, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO).

4. Flashing and sheet metal related to parapet walls and new construction are specified in Section 07600, Flashing and Sheet Metal.

5. Sealant used in flashing and sheet metal work or other items incidental to roof work are specified in Section 07920, Building and Paving Joint Sealers.


A. Qualifications:

1. All roof patching work on warranted roofing systems shall be performed by only a roofing contractor permitted and certified by the roofing system manufacturer to work on these roofs.

2. The installing contractor shall comply with the manufacturer’s requirements to maintain warranty on existing modified bitumen roofing systems.

a. Exchange roof. b. DeCA Commissary roof.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited Standards and specified manufacturer's catalogs, current at the date of bidding documents, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern the work.

1. If conflict is discovered between referenced Standards or catalogs and the project specifications, request written clarification from the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2. Do not proceed with the work until receiving clarification.

B. Standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM). 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 4. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA).


5. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA). 6. Federal Specifications (Fed Spec).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accord with Section 01340 of this Project Manual.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings to the manufacturer for review. 2. Submit only manufacturer reviewed shop drawings for review by Tyndall AFB

and/or designated representative. 3. Minimum scale for roof plan: 1/8” = 1’-0”. 4. Minimum scale for details: 1 ½” = 1’-0”.

C. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's specifications for roofing system, 2 sets. 2. Roof insulation specifications, 2 sets. 3. Parapet overflow drains, PCV piping and fittings and lambs tongue termination

specifications and details, 2 sets. 4. Sheet metal components: Refer to Section 07600, Flashing and Sheet Metal.


A. Per roofing manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Deliver materials requiring fire resistant classifications packaged with labels intact and legible.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Construction:

1. Total thickness of existing Exchange and DeCA Commissary roofing systems is ±3 ½ inches with approximately 1/4 inch per foot slope built into structural system.

a. Existing BUR system consists of the following components from surface to deck:

1.) Granular surfaced modified bitumen cap sheet. 2.) Multi-layer built-up roofing system of roof felts mopped to insulation

system. 3.) 2-layer flat roof insulation estimated at 3 inch thickness.

b. Exchange side has granular surfaced cap sheet base flashings. c. DeCA side has metal surfaced cap sheet base flashing that may be torch-

down applied.

2. Through parapet wall sheet metal and PVC overflow drains and spillouts will not be reused.

3. Wood parapet wall blocking will not be reused. 4. Sheet metal coping covers will not be reused.

B. Environmental Conditions:

1. Test and remove roofing only in dry weather. 2. Install roofing and insulation only in dry weather. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s climatic restrictions.


C. Protection:

1. Protect roof membrane, building surfaces, paving, and landscaping from traffic and roofing equipment.

2. Restore or replace all work or materials damaged by the roofing operation. 3. Remove protection materials upon completion of the work. 4. Restrict foot traffic on completed roofing work.

D. Sequencing, Scheduling and Coordination:

1. Sequence and coordinated scheduling of work in accord with Section 01520. 2. Coordinate major categories of work of other trades so that foot traffic of any kind

is prohibited on completed roofing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Contractor: Maintain both Exchange and DeCA Commissary warranties.

B. Exchange:

1. The existing roofing system is under material warranty from Soprema, Inc., 310 Quadral Drive, Wadsworth, OH 44281.

2. The existing roofing system contractor was Centennial Roofing, 1601 Lisenby Avenue, Panama City, FL 32405.

3. Do not perform any demolition or new construction work on any portion of warranted roof system without written documentation of approval to proceed from Tyndall AFB BCE, Soprema, Inc. and Centennial Roofing with written agreement that current roof warranty will be effective after conclusion of this Project.

C. DeCA Commissary:

1. The existing roofing system is under warranty, however, manufacturer and/or roofing contractor under which warranty is held is unknown.

2. Contractor shall contact DeCA Headquarters, 1300 E Avenue, Fort Lee, VA 23801-1800, (804) 734-8000 to obtain assistance that may provide information pertaining to roofing system manufacturer, original contractor and current roof warranty.

3. Do not perform any demolition or new construction work on any portion of warranted roof system without written documentation of approval to proceed from Tyndall AFB and DeCA.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Use materials for roofing system patching including, but not limited to, insulations, mechanical anchors, bitumen, roofing felt, cap sheet, flashings and other related components manufactured or recommended by roofing system manufacturers.

B. Materials and roofing systems for patching work shall be selected to match existing materials and roofing systems throughout and shall be installed in a manner to ensure that both currently held roofing system warranties are maintained.

2.2 RELATED ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Parapet overflow drains: Provide scupper type parapet roof drains as indicated and manufactured by Zurn Industries LLC, 511 West Freshwater Way, Milwaukee, WI 53204.


1. Model NumberZ187, IP, Z scupper roof drain with threaded outlet and grate, 2-inch pipe size.

2. Dura-coated cast iron body with reversible back or bottom outlet, oblique aluminum gate with 90º combination frame and membrane flashing clamp.

B. PVC pipe: Provide solid-wall PVC pipe and fittings, ASTM D 2665.

1. Pipe size shall be limited to 1 ½-inch ID for clearances. 2. Provide socket type fittings fabricated to ASTM D 331 in type and size for pipe

requirements.

a. Threaded reducing coupling from 2-inch drain outlet to 1 ½-inch pipe size. b. Elbows as required for offsets. c. 2-inch to 1 ½-inch reducing bushing compatible with glue-on lambs tongue

termination.

3. Provide solvent cement and adhesive primer:

a. Solvent cement shall have VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Adhesive primer shall have VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Lambs tongue terminations: Provide lambs tongue discharge nozzles as indicated and manufactured by Roctorseal, 2601 Spenwick Drive, Houston, TX 77055.

1. Product number 82700 glue on nozzle, 2” pipe size. 2. Cast nickel brass construction with bonded, threaded and sealed PVC insert

allowing nozzle to glue directly onto PVC pipe. 3. Cast nickel brass escutcheon shall be designed to seal over end of pipe

penetration through EIFS surface.

2.3 METAL FLASHINGS

A. Refer to Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal for sheet metal fabrications and counter flashings.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Comply with the manufacturer's climatic restrictions.

B. Installation during weather conditions other than those permitted in the manufacturer’s specifications shall be acknowledged in writing by the manufacturer and roofing subcontractor to Contracting Officer and designated representative prior to work being done under those conditions.

C. Removal and installation shall only be performed during dry weather..

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, unevenness, or other conditions that could prevent the best quality installation and longevity of the roofing, flashing, and accessory components.

B. Notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative of all deficiencies.


C. Do not proceed with the work until all deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry before starting and during performance of work.

B. Verify that all work of subcontractors that penetrate the roof deck or requires men and equipment to traverse the roof deck has been completed before proceeding with roofing system installation.

C. Install fire retardant treated wood blocking specified in Section 06100 and 06300.

1. Install as indicated, coordinate and solidly shimmed level at top of existing sloped parapet walls.

2. Wood blocking attachment to existing concrete substrates shall be with sleeve anchors and concrete screw anchors of size and spacing required to resist wind conditions at Project location using the most stringent criteria set forth below:

a. Fastener type, placement and frequency of fasteners shall be calculated according to American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) for components and cladding and after multiplying the results with a safety factor of 1.25.

b. Fastening of wood blocking shall also comply with Miami Dade County requirements.

D. Install heavy-duty fiber board cant strips per manufacturers recommendations and written instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF RELATED ROOF MATERIALS

A. Core drill through existing precast concrete parapet walls at locations indicated and install new parapet scupper drains.

1. Ensure that drain inlets are above flowline of roof in compliance with IPC and to provide drainage only in an overflow situation where existing roof drains are obstructed.

2. Securely anchor to substrate. 3. Install cant strips in conjunction with setting drain and compatible with slope and

height of drain body. 4. Extend roof felts and parapet wall flashings over flanges of drain body and clamp

roofing between body and flashing clamp.

B. Install new PVC piping as indicated to be fully concealed within new framing and behind sheathing.

1. Extend piping through plane of new exterior wall finish and seal after application of new EIFS work in full compliance with requirements established by EIFS manufacturer for sealing penetrations through system.

C. Install lambs tongue discharge nozzle by gluing to discharge end of PVC piping and seal to face of EIFS as approved by finish system manufacturer to prevent water from infiltrating the finish system.

3.5 ROOFING SYSTEM PATCHING

A. Install the roof insulation with end joints staggered at mid-point in each layer.


1. Offset all joints between layers a minimum of 12 inches. 2. Hot Asphalt Attached Insulation directly to surface of previously installed base

sheet.

a. Solid mop with a minimum of 23 pounds per 100 square feet. b. Increase quantities as recommended by roofing manufacturer to attain the

equivalent of an I-120 wind uplift rating. c. Kettle temperature shall not exceed 500 degrees F. maximum.

3. Attach subsequent layers with hot asphalt.

B. Asphalt temperature at the point of embedding fiberglass ply sheets and modified bitumen membranes shall be at equiviscous temperature (EVT) but no less than 400E F.

C. Asphalt to be applied no more than 5 seconds ahead of modified bitumen membrane installation.

D. Install all roofing and flashing systems and all accessory components in accord with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

E. Install the BOTTOM PLY, 2ND PLY in shingle fashion and install CAP SHEET during the same day.

F. Apply cap sheet asphalt so that a small amount is visible the full length of each lap.

G. Install the BOTTOM PLY, 2ND PLY and CAP SHEET all in the same day. (NO PHASING OF ROOF PLY INSTALLATION WILL BE ALLOWED.)

H. Attach termination bars with fasteners 6" maximum on center.

3.6 ADJUST, CLEAN AND PROTECT

A. Carefully inspect all completed work and correct all defects.

B. Remove from the job site and legally dispose of all debris.

C. Clean up bitumen and mastic spills and spattering.

D. Remove all surplus materials, tools, and equipment.

E. Prevent storage of materials and equipment on the completed roof.

F. Protect completed work from damage by other trades and make repairs or replace damaged work at no additional cost to AAFES or Tyndall AFB.

END 07536.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07540 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (TPO)

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (TPO) 07540-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Install new construction including, but not limited to:

1. Mechanically fastened underlayment layer directly over new plywood roof sheathing.

2. Adhered glass mat-face iso overlay board. 3. Fully adhered TPO membrane system with welded joints at new roof areas. 4. Roof edge flashings. 5. Miscellaneous accessory items necessary to complete the weather tight, FM

recognized, warranted roofing system indicated in full compliance with Miami Dade County requirements and specified building codes for resistance to uplift.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 7. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 8. Section 07920 – Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

B. Installed but specified elsewhere:

1. Wood blocking and fasteners at all locations indicated is specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

2. Base flashing of new construction into existing multi-ply modified bitumen roofing system shall be coordinated with this work and is specified in Section 07536, Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only).

3. Manufactured sheet metal items related to new roof are specified in Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

4. Sealants used for sealing joints in sheet metal and other locations not furnished by the roofing system manufacturer are specified in Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers.


A. Roofing Subcontractor Qualifications:

1. The installing subcontractor shall be approved or franchised by the roofing system manufacturer.

2. The job foreman shall be trained by the manufacturer in the installation of the specified system.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Any of the manufacturers whose systems are specified under "Acceptable Roofing System Manufacturers" in this Section shall be deemed as qualified Roofing System Manufacturers under this Contract subject to strict compliance with the Contract Documents.


1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited Standards and specified manufacturers' catalogs, current at the date of bidding documents, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern the work.

1. If conflict is discovered between referenced Standards or catalogs and the project specifications, request written clarification from the A/E.

2. Do not proceed with the work until receiving clarification.

B. Standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Cool Roof Ratings Council. 3. EPA – Energy Star Roof Products. 4. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM). 5. Federal Specifications (FS). 6. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (NRCA). 7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accord with Section 01340.

B. Additional submittals directly related to work by Contractor NOT directly specified in this Section shall be coordinated with roofing system and submitted as specified under the requirements in those respective Sections.

C. Endorsement of Roofing Firm: Contractor shall, within l5 days of receiving the Notice of Award, submit the manufacturer's endorsement of the installing firm.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings to the manufacturer for review and comment.

a. Indicate mechanical fastener pattern for underlayment to new steel roof deck, including any additional requirements at perimeter in order to meet specified uplift requirements.

b. Confirm adhesive requirements for adhering overlay board. c. Indicate adhesive requirements for roofing membrane, flashings and other

components to meet specified uplift resistance.

2. Submit only manufacturer approved shop drawings for review. 3. Minimum Scale for Roof Plan: 1/8" = 1' 0". 4. Minimum Scale for Details: 1 1/2" = 1' 0. 5. Submit the following:

a. Roof plans including mechanical fastener pattern for roof board underlayment and requirements for vapor retarder membrane and include:

1.) Roof insulation plans with adhesion requirements.

b. Details illustrating installation and fastenings of the following:

1.) Perimeter membrane termination. 2.) Base flashing and membrane termination including counter flashings. 3.) Strip flashings and seam sealant.

E. Product Data:


1. Submit manufacturers data, specifications and cut sheets for all major roof components and accessory items specified herein including:

a. Fiberboard underlayment/insulation. b. Glass mat-face iso overlay board. c. Manufacturer's specifications for roofing system. d. Membrane adhesive. e. Termination bars and fasteners.

F. Samples:

1. Underlayment, 8” x 10”, 2 pieces. 2. Underlayment fasteners, 2 of each type. 3. Glass mat-faced polyisocyanurate cover board, 8” x 10” , 2 pieces. 4. TPO membrane, 4" x 6", 3 pieces. 5. Sheet Metal: Refer to Section 07600.


A. Uplift Criteria: The specified roofing assembly must have been successfully tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the design uplift pressures calculated according to American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) for components and cladding and after multiplying the results with a safety factor of 1.25 or greater and in accord with Miami Dade County requirements.

B. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.


A. Per roofing manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Deliver materials requiring fire resistant classifications packaged with labels intact and legible.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. New Construction:

1. New roof structure consists of cold-formed metal C-S/J members spaced as indicated and supported on structural steel framing or cold formed metal stud system.

2. No slope will be built into the structure. 3. New roof deck consists of ¾-inch fire retardant treated APA plywood sheathing.

B. Environmental Conditions:

1. Install roofing and insulation only in dry weather. 2. Comply with manufacturer's climatic restrictions.

C. Protection:

1. Contractor shall provide substantial water-tight tie-offs at the end of each work day to ensure that storm water cannot infiltrate into existing occupied building.

2. Protect roof membrane, building surfaces, paving and landscaping from traffic and roofing equipment.

3. Restore or replace all work or materials damaged by the roofing operation.


4. Remove protection materials upon completion of work. 5. Avoid traffic on completed roofing work.

D. Sequencing, Scheduling and Coordination:

1. In accord with Section 01320, Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Comply with all regulations imposed by Tyndall AFB BCE, the AAFES Contracting

Officer, AAFES General Manager, AAFES Store Manager and DeCA Commissary Store Manager at the Project site.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer: Execute Roofing System Manufacturer's Total System Warranty covering both labor and material with no dollar limitation.

1. Warranty shall cover all roofing components including insulation attachment. 2. Maximum wind speed coverage shall be peak gusts of 155 mph measured at 10

meters above ground level. 3. Warranty shall be from membrane manufacturer.

a. No dual source warranties will be accepted b. Pro-rated system warranties will not be accepted.

4. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide all adhesives, sealants, pre-molded and field fabricated flashings, fasteners, and other related components for the entire roofing system as manufactured or recommended by the selected manufacturer.

B. Use only materials and components manufactured or recommended by the selected manufacturer throughout the project.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

CODE BRAND NAME MANUFACTURER

A. CAR Carlisle SynTec Systems, Carlisle, PA

B. FIR Firestone Bldg. Products Co., Carmel, IN

C. GAF GAF Materials Corporation, Wayne, NJ

2.3 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS

A. Fully Adhered .080 thick TPO (Thermoplastic Polyolefin) membrane as follows:

1. CAR – Sure-Weld TPO 2. FIR – UltraPly TPO 3. GAF – EverGuard

B. Minimum membrane thickness over reinforcing scrim shall be nominal .015” thick (15 mil).

C. Membrane and related flashing components shall be white in color.


2.4 UNDERLAYMENT/INSULATION LAYER

A. Provide ½-inch thick, R-1.3 ft2-h-ºF/BTU in., fire retardant, high density fiberboard panels designed for exterior installation as a thermal barrier substrate underlayment and for adhesion of subsequent roof insulation as manufactured by Blue Ridge, Structodek HD, fiberboard roof insulation with primed red coating.

1. Maximum width: 4’. 2. Maximum length: 8’.

B. Provide screw-type mechanical fasteners with plates as recommended by the underlayment and the roofing system manufacturer for application indicated.

2.5 COVER BOARD

A. Select a brand of high-density, closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core laminated to coated glass fiber mat facer acceptable to the roofing system manufacturer as follows:

TYPE ASTM R-VALUE

1. Cover Board:

a. ¼-inch Glass Mat-Faced ISO C1289-11 1.25 @ ¼” (LTTR)

2.6 COVERBOARD ATTACHMENT

A. Coverboard attachment shall be by two component, heated, insulation type adhesive as manufactured or approved by the roofing system manufacturer with the following properties:

1. 150% elongation. 2. No more than 25% MDI content.

B. Heated adhesive shall be designed to be applied using one of the following methods as approved by roofing system manufacturer:

1. Full coverage spray application. 2. High pressure extrusion process at a minimum pressure of 500 psi with

attachment rows spaced at a maximum of 4” on center.

C. No cold applied products or asphalt will be allowed.

D. Adhesive shall be manufactured or approved by the roofing system manufacturer and certified by roof system manufacturer to provide specified uplift requirements when used for adhesion of multiple layers of insulation and related roofing materials.

2.7 AUXILIARY INSULATION AND SUBSTRATE MATERIALS

A. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by underlayment and coverboard manufacturers for bonding edge joints and filling voids.

B. Miscellaneous Sealants: Cut-edge sealant, water cut-off mastic, universal single-ply sealant and pourable sealer as recommended and approved by the roofing system manufacturer for various applications.

C. TPO Membrane Cleaner: Use to prepare membrane that has been exposed to the elements prior to hear welding or to remove dirt from membrane surfaces.


D. Flashings: .080 TPO flashing and edge fasteners as recommended and approved by the roofing system manufacturer.

E. Membrane Termination Bars:

1. 1/8” x 1 ¼” aluminum bar with a 45° sealant pocket at all locations indicated and where required by roofing system manufacturer to terminate membrane.

2. Fasten all termination bars to solid substrate with appropriate fasteners at spacing not to exceed 6” centers.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Install roofing only in dry weather.

B. Comply with manufacturer's climatic restrictions.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces and components for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, unevenness or other conditions that could prevent the best quality and longevity of roofing, flashing and accessory components.

1. Inspect plywood roof deck to determine damaged or structurally impaired areas that may need to be replaced and notify Contracting Officer and designated representative in writing immediately upon discovery of such conditions.

a. Identify any low areas or uneven deck conditions that could inhibit the flow of water to roof edge spill-out scuppers.

b. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative of all deficiencies.

2. Verify that other related construction including wood blocking, underlayment and overlay components are securely installed to resist specified wind uplift ratings and per prefabricated sheet metal component manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Do not proceed with the work until all deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the roof system manufacturer and the Contracting Officer.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry before starting and during performance of work.

B. Verify that all other work of subcontractors that requires men and equipment to traverse the roof deck has been completed before proceeding with roofing system installation.

3.4 SUBSTRATE UNDERLAYMENT/INSULATION COVER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install thermal barrier substrate underlayment/insulation per manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Ends and sides of adjacent sheets shall butt tightly together to provide a continuous solid and secure substrate for adhesive application of subsequent layers of insulation.

2. Space mechanical fasteners at ends, sides and in the field of the sheet per roofing system manufacturer’s recommendations for specified uplift rating.


B. Install the overlay board with end joints staggered at midpoint and joints butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater that ¼ inch.

1. Position sheets to accommodate irregularities substrate to avoid bucking water. 2. Adhesive attach overlay board directly to surface of previously installed thermal

barrier substrate underlayment.

3.5 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT

A. Install the roofing and flashing system and all accessory items in accord with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Position membrane over manufacturer approved substrate by folding sheet back lengthwise so half the underside of the membrane is exposed.

C. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions, to the exposed underside of the membrane and the corresponding substrate area.

1. Do not apply bonding adhesive along the splice edge of the membrane to be hot air welded over the adjoining sheet.

2. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch.

3. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. 4. Brush down the bonded section of the membrane sheet immediately after rolling

the membrane into the adhesive with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.

5. Fold back un-bonded half of the sheet lengthwise and repeat the bonding procedures.

D. Position adjoining sheets to allow a minimum overlap of 2” and hot air weld the membrane sheets as set forth below and in accordance with the manufacturer’s hot air welding procedures.

1. Pull the un-bonded adjoining membrane back along the welded splice so the entire underside of the membrane is exposed one the hot air weld has been completed.

2. Apply adhesive to the exposed underside of the membrane sheet and substrate

and allow to dry until tacky as specified above. 3. Roll the membrane onto the substrate and brush down the bonded section with a

bristle broom following the procedures specified above.

E. Continue to install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges a minimum of 2” and complete the bonding procedures set forth above.

3.6 MEMBRANE SPLICING/NOT AIR WELDING PROCEDURES

A. Hot air weld membrane using an automatic hot air welding machine in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications.

1. At all splice intersections, toll the seam with a silicone roller to ensure a continuous hot air welded seam.

2. All splice intersections shall be overlaid with non-reinforced flashing.

B. Probe all seams after the hot air weld have thoroughly cooled (approximately 30-minutes) and repair all seam deficiencies immediately after they are discovered.


C. Apply cut edge sealant on all cut edges of reinforced membrane where scrim reinforcement is exposed after seam probing is complete.

3.7 FLASHING

A. Flash roof edges and other parts of the roof using reinforced membrane flashings.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s standard flashing procedures for all wall flashing including manufactured sheet metal fascia system.


A. The Contracting Officer or designated representative will provide on-site observation during installation.

B. The roofing manufacturer will provide on-site observation and instruction as the manufacturer deems necessary to effect issuance of Total System Warranty.


A. Carefully inspect all completed work and correct all defects.

B. Remove from job site and legally dispose of rubbish and debris.

C. Remove tools, equipment and construction aids.

D. Prevent storage of material or equipment on the completed roof.

E. Prior to manufacturer’s inspection for warranty, the Contractor shall perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify that all flashing has been properly placed and sealant application has been completed.

F. Contractor shall accompany the manufacturer's Technical Inspector during inspection and assist with equipment and workmen if necessary to provide access to the roof.

G. Correct all defects noted during inspection.

END 07540.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07600 – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Prefinished manufactured coping cover system. b. Prefinished manufactured fascia system with spillouts. c. Prefinished shop fabricated counter flashings. d. Prefinished shop fabricated window head flashings. e. Miscellaneous sheet metal items and accessories related to exterior closure.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems-Class PB. 7. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 8. Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 9. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 10. Section 07920 – Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

B. Installation of all sheet metal items related to roofing systems shall be coordinated with work performed under Section 07536, Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only) and Section 07540, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO).


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Codes, Regulations and Recommendations:

1. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations. 2. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).

C. Substitution of shop fabricated sheet metal items will not be allowed where manufactured items are specifically called for under this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340 and in coordination with Sections 07536 and 07540.

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.


2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements.

3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, that after review by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.

B. Detailed Shop drawings illustrating the following:

1. Gauge and finish of stock material. 2. Fabrication techniques. 3. Installation drawings including techniques and anchorage. 4. Interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.

a. Coordinate shop drawings with those of other manufactured items related to this work to illustrate interrelationship between components.

b. Show all blocking and substrates to which sheet metal components will be attached.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging with all labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations and in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of the way of construction operations.

C. Materials furnished under this Section that may be installed by other trades shall be delivered to the site in time to avoid delays to construction progress.

D. Handle all material in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard 20-year warranty.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet Metal:

1. ASTM B209-76, alloy 3003, temper H14. 2. Minimum thickness subject to performance requirements of AAMA 1402-86:

a. Prefinished coping cover up to 16” width: .050”. b. Prefinished coping cover up to 27” width: .063”. c. Cleats: .040”. d. Counter flashing: .040”. e. TPO Coated Edge Trim: .040" (Uncoated Thickness). f. Pipe/Power Portal Top Housings: .050" g. Window head drip flashing: .040”. h. Miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically designated: .032”.

B. Sheet Metal Finish:

1. Exposed metal finish shall be high performance organic coating as follows:

a. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.


b. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Fluoropolymer 2-coat coating system, thermocured, composed of specially formulated primer and fluoroplymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.

2. Items not directly exposed to view such as cleats, reglets and anchor clips may be fabricated from mill finish aluminum or manufacturers standard sheet metal material.

C. Fasteners:

1. Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

2. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

D. Recycled Content: Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation requirements.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Sealant: Type I as specified in Section 07 90 00.

B. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

C. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, cleats, backer plates, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work.

1. Accessories shall match or be compatible with material being installed. 2. Materials shall be non-corrosive. 3. Size and gage as required for specified performance.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Prefabricate system in manufacturer’s plant to greatest extent possible.

B. Miter and weld joints in tops and faces of end caps and weld joint in top and inside corner.

1. Continuously weld all joints. 2. Perform welding prior to finishing.

C. Pop rivets, interlocking discontinuities and other fasteners exposed in finish work are unacceptable.

2.4 SHOP FABRICATED UNITS (Only Items Without Specified Manufacturer)

A. General Metal Fabrication:

1. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible.

a. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of work.

b. Form work to fit substrates. c. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks; true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.


2. Comply with drawing details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices.

3. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material.

B. Seams:

1. Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. 2. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for strength where

required.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within joints.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.

E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator.

2.5 ALUMINUM COPING COVER & FASCIA SYSTEMS

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers for items indicated:

MANUFACTURER COPING PRODUCT FASCIA PRODUCT

1. Metal-Era, Inc., Perma-Tite Gold Anchor-Tite Fascia 1600 Airport Road Waukesha, WI 53188

(800) 558-2162

2. Petersen Aluminum Pac-Tite Gold Pac-Tite WT BUM 1005 Tonne Road Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 (800) 722-2523

3. OMG Edge Systems Custom Profile Coping TerminEdge EX MB 153 Bowles Road Agawam, MA 01001 (800) 633-3800

B. Characteristics:

1. Wind Resistance: Coping cover and fascia shall resist 155 mph minimum wind speed.

2. Material: Smooth surfaced formed aluminum alloy in thickness as determined by manufacturer to comply with indicated performance but not less than .050 inch.

3. Roll-Forming: Front and back drip legs shall be factory roll-formed. 4. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating system. 5. Face Height: 6 inch minimum as indicated. 6. Lengths: 12’-0” minimum or as long as practical to minimize joints. 7. Joints: Concealed splice plates in accordance with manufacturer’s product data.


C. Accessories:

1. Spillouts: Integral sheet metal spillouts to match manufactured fascia system, 18” wide.

2. Splice Plates: Minimum .032 inch thick aluminum sheet, 6 inch minimum length, continuous with front and rear legs and with extruded butyl seal for concealed installation in finish to match coping.

3. Anchor Plate: Galvanized steel of manufacturer’s FM approved standard design. 4. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be as provided or recommended by coping system

manufacturer. 5. Prefabricated sections: Factory assembled, continuously welded, mitered corners

and continuously welded transitions shall match copings in design and finish. 6. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally

free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.6 COUNTER FLASHINGS

A. 2-Piece Counter Flashings:

1. Provide two-piece sheet metal counter flashings as indicated at all base flashing conditions where roofing is flashed to vertical wall.

a. Form two-piece counter flashing receptor with horizontal flange to fit into saw-cut joint in masonry.

b. Horizontal flange shall extend into previously prepared sawcut made in masonry bed joint and securely anchored using lead shim and sealant.

c. Angle exposed end of horizontal flange out ¾ inch at 45 degrees and double back hem ¾ inch to form a reglet to receive flange of lower two-piece counter flashing.

d. Form second piece cover leg of counter flashing as indicated to extend down over base flashing.

1.) Break and fold over top edge of lower component ¾ inch at 45 degrees to insert into double back hem of reglet.

2.) Pop-rivet two-piece reglet and lower component flange together to form a solid unit capable of future removal by drilling out rivets.

3.) Provide break in face of lower component to ensure compression against base flashing and fold bottom edge of vertical flange out ½ inch at a 45 degree angle to form a hemmed drip.

e. Face height of counter flashing shall cover TPO base flashing a minimum of 4 inches plus the drip.

2. Form counter flashings in 10-foot lengths except where shorter pieces are required and provide shop fabricated closures at ends of counter flashing runs to return to face of wall.

3. Provide sealant per requirements of Section 07920.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. 2. Do not proceed with flashing or sheet metal work until unsatisfactory conditions

are corrected.


B. Coordinate items to be shop fabricated with related items to ensure dimensional compatibility and clearances.

3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION

A. Before ordering sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered by making and recording all necessary field measurements.

B. Determine lengths of runs and other required dimensions to avoid delays in production and installation.

C. Ensure that all substrates are properly prepared, free of distortions that could affect finished sheet metal appearance before commencing with flashing and sheet metal work.

D. WORKMANSHIP

E. Screws, bolts and similar fastenings required for proper installation and anchorage of work shall be type best suited for application, intended purpose and shall be non-corrosive.

F. Keep work straight during erection.

1. Free from buckles, dents, twists, warps, waves or unfinished edges. 2. Without fastening stresses or distortions. 3. Reinforce all edges and anchoring points if required to maintain alignment.

G. Patching of work will not be permitted and if damage occurs, entire piece shall be removed and replaced with new material.

H. Do not allow ferrous and non-ferrous metals to come into contact with each other.

1. Aluminum in direct contact with masonry, steel or other dissimilar metals shall receive a protective coating of bituminous paint.

2. Provide minimum of 7.5 mil. Thickness on each contact surface.

3.3 SEAMING

A. Field joints in aluminum .040-inch and thinner shall be made mechanically.

B. All seams and joints shall be lapped in direction of water flow.

3.4 GENERAL FLASHING

A. Sheet metal flashings indicated shall be provided as required to produce a watertight installation.

B. Joints shall be lapped, riveted, welded, locked or sealed as conditions warrant.

C. Provide all accessories as required for proper installation.

3.5 PREFABRICATED COPING AND FASCIA INSTALLATION

A. Install coping and fascia systems in accord with manufacturer’s product data and approved shop drawings.


B. Install anchor plates with concealed fasteners at spacing as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install concealed splice plates at coping and fascia intersections.

D. Snap copings and fascia covers into place over anchor plates and splice plates, with minimum ¼ inch wide joints over splice plate intersections.

E. Set copings and fascia cover over splice plates with extruded butyl tape, ½ inch from intersection edges.

F. Provide weather-tight fit, allowing for expansion and contraction.

3.6 COUNTER FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashings in coordination with TPO roofing requirements.

B. Provide shop formed inside and outside corners and concealed splice plates at all joints.

C. Install metal receptor portion of two-piece counter flashings at locations and to profile indicated on drawings.

1. Where counter flashing terminates in reglet joint in masonry wall, horizontal bent flange shall extend into sawcut joint a minimum of 1 ½ -inch.

a. Complete installation in joint by inserting lead wedges for tight, solid fit. b. Fill joint with continuous backer rod and sealant of color to match adjacent

masonry mortar.

2. Securely anchor receptor by nailing where counter flashing terminates on equipment curb as indicated.

D. Insert vertical face flanges of two-piece counter flashings into receptor hems and pop rivet at 8-inch centers.

1. Counter flashing shall provide spring action against base flashing when installation is complete.

2. Seal pop rivet holes with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00.

3.7 ADJUST & CLEANING

A. Examine completed work for damage and conformance with contract documents.

B. Remove damaged pieces and replace with new, materials meeting requirements of the specification.

C. Completed work shall be cleaned as in accordance with sheet metal manufacturer's instructions and left free of stains, discoloration and sharp edges.

D. Remove all scrap and debris and dispose of off-site and leave all work areas clean.

END 07600.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07920 – BUILDING JOINT SEALERS

BUILDING JOINT SEALERS 07920-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All sealing of building joints. b. All joint fillers and accessories indicated and herein specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. All Sections of the Specifications.


A. Qualifications of installers: Employ only experienced craftsmen, skilled in the installation of specified products.

B. Contractor shall select one manufacturer for all exposed sealants and caulking.

1. Coordinate purchase of sealants and caulking with individual subcontractors so that each trade will furnish compatible products of the selected manufacturer.

2. Coordinate installation with individual subcontractors so that methods and colors for all exposed sealants and caulking will match.

C. Color(s) will be selected by Architect from standard range of colors available from manufacturer selected by Contractor.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Industry standards as set forth by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

B. Manufacturer's Catalogs: The acceptable manufacturer's catalogs, current at date of bidding documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if repeated herein at length.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340 and applicable technical Sections.

B. Product data:

1. Materials description. 2. Manufacturer's current printed installation instructions for each product.

C. Samples: Each compound and joint filler for color selection.



A. Deliver all products in manufacturer's original containers, with seals unbroken, labels, product and manufacturer's names intact and legible.

B. Store all products in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of way of construction operations and provide protection until ready for use.

C. Handle in accord with manufacturer's written recommendations.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental conditions:

1. Weather: Do not install products during adverse weather conditions. 2. Temperature: Ensure that surface and ambient temperatures are within the range

recommended by the manufacturer.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work to coincide with work of other subcontractors.

B. Perform work of this Section as soon as possible after permanent installation of products requiring joint sealants.

1.9 WARRANTY

B. Two-year warranty on all sealants, caulk, joint fillers and related accessories.

C. Contractor provide written warranty for work furnished, on Contractor’s letterhead, to Architect at time of Project Close-out in accord with Section 01700.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. DOW DOW Chemical Co. Midland, MI

2. GE GE Silicones Waterford, NY

3. MEAD W.R. Meadows, Inc. Elgin, IL

4. PECO Pecora Chemical Corp. Harleysville, PA

5. MAS GASF Corporation Construction Systems Shakopee, MN

6. TREM Tremco Manufacturing Co. Cleveland, OH

2.2 SEALANTS

A. Generic description and use:


1. S-1: One component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant.

a. Use in all joints one-inch wide or less wherever movement may occur, at contraction and expansion joints.

b. Designed for joints in metal to metal, sheet metal to concrete, E.I.F.S. to E.I.F.S. and E.I.F.S to masonry, concrete or other dissimilar materials wherever E.I.F.S. manufacturer recommends use.

2. S-2: Two component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant for use in all joints wherever movement may occur in locations indicated for S-1 sealant.

3. S-3: One component polyurethane, non-sag, gun grade, textured elastomeric performance sealant for use in all veneer limestone joints in lieu of mortar.

a. Do not use this sealant for other applications.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with subcontractors for selection of one of the following specified sealants for use on entire Project.

C. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE S-1 S-2 S-3

1. DOW 2. GE 3. MEAD Pourthane NS 4. PECO Dynatrol I Dynatrol II 5. MAS NPI NPII TX1 6. TREM Dymonic Dymeric

D. Color: Provide color as selected by Contracting Officer for specific locations and to match adjacent materials.

2.3 JOINT FILLERS

A. Generic description and use:

1. JF-1: Backer rod for elastomeric sealants.

a. Extruded closed-cell polyethylene foam or polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam.

b. Non-bleeding, non-staining, oversized 30 to 50 percent.

2. JF-2: Preformed fiber joint filler, asphalt impregnated.

B. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE JF-1 JF-2

1. DOW Ethafoam 2. MEAD Backer Rod Fiber E.J. 3. SON Sonofoam 4. WIL Expand-O-Foam

2.4 JOINT CLEANER

A. Joint Cleaner: Type recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing compound for the specific joint surface and condition.


2.5 BOND BREAKER

A. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape; pressure sensitive recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly inspect all existing construction and the conditions under which the work will be performed and report to the Architect all conditions that would adversely affect installation of the work.

B. Verify that all joint dimensions are in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of construction and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare and size joints in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Remove all loose materials and foreign matter using compressed air. 2. Proof areas to ensure that joint is free of all materials that might impair adhesion of

sealant or caulking.

B. Prior to installing sealants in horizontal joints where asphalt impregnated expansion joint fillers or other non-polyethylene joint fillers have already been placed, cut filler to 1 inch below surface of concrete and install polyethylene tape directly over the cut edge.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Install bond breaker tape wherever recommended by manufacturer to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly.

C. Install sealants and caulking in uniform, continuous ribbons, without gaps or air pockets.

1. Ensure complete "wetting" of the joints. 2. Bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 3. Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.

D. Install sealants to depths indicated or when not indicated, within the following limitations:

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 3/4” deep or less than 3/8” deep.

2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50 percent of joint width but not more than 1/2” deep or less than 1/4” deep.

3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75 percent to 125 percent of joint width.

E. Spillage:

1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces. 2. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining

surfaces.


3.4 CURING

A. Cure sealant compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

3.5 ADJUST & CLEAN

A. Upon completion, carefully examine all sealant and caulking work.

1. Remove all damaged and defective work. 2. Replace defective work with new materials.

B. Clean up and remove all surplus products, containers and rubbish and dispose of off site.

C. Remove all spilled or spattered materials from all surfaces.

1. When adjacent surfaces or other work has been damaged or stained as a result of sealing work, repair all damage.

2. Remove all stains to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work during remainder of construction period.

B. Ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal wear or weathering) at substantial completion.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Sealants:

1. Use for all exterior applications where joint filling is required such as:

a. Between EIFS to EIFS and EIFS to concrete. b. Between EIFS to other dissimilar materials. c. Between metal to metal joints. d. Between veneer limestone to veneer limestone. e. Between metals and other dissimilar materials. f. Between dissimilar finish materials.

2. At contraction and expansion joints. 3. At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide a

weather tight seal between materials. END 07920.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09100 – LATH & PLASTER

LATH & PLASTER 09100-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All plaster for patching of existing soffits. b. All plaster accessory items as necessary to complete patching of existing

plaster soffits that may include:

1.) Metal lath. 2.) Cornerites. 3.) Metal grounds and screeds. 4.) Corner beads and casing beads. 5.) Double V expansion joints.

c. All plaster ceiling suspension systems including framing channels and tie wire.

d. All fasteners, trim and related items necessary to complete the work of this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Division 7 – Thermal & Moisture Protection. 6. Section 09900 – Painting. 7. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. All work shall be performed in accordance with requirements of the International Building Code, 2015 Edition and The Gypsum Construction Handbook, 7th Edition by the United States Gypsum Company.

B. Fire resistance ratings shall conform to UL 40 U18 specifications.

C. All plastering work shall be performed by or under the supervision of journeymen mechanics with experience on at least three (3) projects equal to or larger in scope than specified work.

D. Maximum deviation from a true plane of 1/8-inch in 10 feet as measured from a line of a straightedge placed at any location on finished surface.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Complete manufacturers’ product data for each product installed under work of this Section including.


1. Plaster products. 2. Plaster accessories. 3. Framing and suspension systems.

C. Certification and Instructions:

1. Manufacturers’ certification stating that materials furnished comply with standards set forth in these specifications.

2. Manufacturer’s printed instructions for mixing sequence, cycle of operation and time for installation.

D. Samples:

1. Metal lath, two (2) 1-square foot pieces. 2. Cornerites, two (2) 1-foot pieces. 3. Metal grounds and screeds, two (2) 1-foot pieces. 4. Corner and casing beads, two (2) 1-foot pieces each.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other conditions that could damage packaging or metals.

C. Neatly stack metal lath panels flat to prevent sagging.

D. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal accessory items.


A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing plaster to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Minimum Temperatures:

1. Manufacturer’s recommendations for installation of framing, metal lath and accessory items.

2. For plaster applications maintain not less than 55 deg F (10 deg C) for 7 days prior to application, during application and for 7 days after application or until drying is complete.

3. Do not use frozen materials in plaster mixes and do not apply plaster to frozen surfaces or surfaces where frost has accumulated.

C. Ventilation and Humidity:

1. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for controlling ventilation and air movement over newly plastered surfaces.

2. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for maximum and minimum humidity conditions that could affect plaster curing and drying.

3. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.

D. Protect finished surfaces installed prior to plastering by covering with plastic sheets, non-staining kraft paper, removable painter’s tape as appropriate to surface being protected and maintain coverings until completion of plaster work.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Plaster and Related Products:

a. Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL CEILING FRAMING COMPONENTS

A. Framing Channels: Framing channels for suspended soffit ceiling framing shall be light-gauge cold-rolled “C” sections, 16 gauge, galvanized steel.

B. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2.3 METAL ACCESSORIES

A. Shapes used as grounds shall be of size required to produce specified plaster thickness.

1. Flanges shall be designed to permit complete embedment of accessory in plaster. 2. Flanges shall allow for alignment and provide solid attachment to substrate.

B. Metal grounds, expansion and ventilation screeds shall be zinc coated sheet metal, 26 gauge minimum, with perforated or expanded flanges not less than 2-inches wide.

C. Cornerites shall be 2 ½-pound flat expanded metal lath bent at right angles to form not less than 3-inch legs on each flange.

D. Tie wire shall be annealed galvanized steel wire conforming to Federal Specification ZZ-W-461, 16 or 18 gauge.

E. Corner beads and casing beads shall be zinc coated sheet metal, 26 gauge minimum, with perforated or expanded flanges not less than 2 ½-inches wide.

2.4 METAL LATH

A. Fabricate metal lath from cold-rolled steel.

B. Furnish with galvanized coating or factory applied rust resistant paint.

C. Expanded Metal Lath:

1. Diamond Mesh: 2.75 pounds per square yard or 3.4 pounds per square yard. 2. Forming: 1/8-inch deep reinforcing ribs.

D. Rib Lath:

1. Diamond Mesh: 3.4 pounds per square yard or 4 pounds per square yard. 2. Forming: 3/8-inch deep reinforcing ribs at 3 ½-inch to 4 ½-inch centers.


2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Plaster:

1. Ready Mixed: ASTM C-28. 2. Wood Fibered: ASTM C-28. 3. Gauging: ASTM C-28.

B. Portland Cement:

1. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C-150, Type I or IA.. 2. Provide white portland cement for finish coats at all areas.

C. Lime shall conform to ASTM C-206, type S for finishing hydrated lime.

D. Sand for base coats shall conform to ASTM C-35.

E. Water shall be potable and free from impurities that affect setting of plaster.

2.6 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING PLASTER

A. General:

1. Accurately Proportion and measure for each plaster batch. 2. Size batches for complete use within a maximum of one hour after mixing and to

set within a maximum of four hours. 3. Do not re-temper or use partially plaster. 4. Do not use frozen, caked or lumpy material when mixing. 5. Mix factory prepared plaster in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions. 6. Use moist, loose sand in mix proportions.

B. Mixing:

1. Mechanically mix all plaster batches. 2. Mixer shall be cleaned of all set or hardened materials before loading materials for

each new batch. 3. Maintain mixer in continuous operation while adding and mixing materials. 4. Mixing sequence, cycle and time shall be as recommended by manufacturer of

plaster materials. 5. Size batches for complete use within a maximum of one hour after mixing. 6. Do not re-temper or use partially set plaster.

C. Mix Proportions:

1. Prepared Gypsum Plaster: Prepare gypsum ready-mixed or factory mixed plaster by addition of water only in strict accord with manufacturer’s written instructions.

a. Metal Lath: (3 coat application.)

1.) Scratch Coat: 100 pounds gypsum neat plaster to 2 cubic feet sand. 2.) Brown Coat: 100 pounds gypsum neat plaster to 3 cubic feet sand.

b. Finish Coat: (Trowel Finish.)

1.) Batch Mixing: 100 pounds gypsum gauging plaster to 200 pounds dry hydrated lime.

2.) Prepared Gypsum Plaster Finish: Mix prepared plaster with water in strict accord with manufacturer’s written instructions.


2. Portland Cement Plaster:

a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 4 parts damp loose sand by volume, 1/8 part hydrated lime.

b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 4 parts damp loose sand by volume, 1/8 part hydrated lime.

c. Finish Coat: 1 part by volume of white portland cement, ¼ part b volume of hydrated lime, 2 ½ parts by volume sand.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Plaster shall be applied to surfaces indicated to be patched to true straight lines, level with surrounding surfaces with square corners at edges meeting dissimilar materials.

B. Newly patched plaster soffit ceiling areas shall be completely undetectable after final paint finish is applied.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Metal grounds and other accessories including screeds and beads shall be carefully examined to see that they are straight, level, square and true to required angles as case may require and all defective work or material replaced or corrected prior to plaster application.

B. All areas to be patched shall be carefully examined and Contracting Officer or designated representative shall be notified in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions that could affect undetectable finish results prior to application.

C. Application of plaster shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been remedied.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF MEAL ACCESSORIES

A. Suspended light gauge channel framing shall be ¾-inch channels at 13 ½-inch centers securely fastened to 1 ½-inch channels suspended at 2-foot centers from structure.

B. Fasten accessories in place using fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

1. Fasten at both ends and at 12-inch maximum centers. 2. Install accessories to bring grounding edge to true lines, level, straight and to

provide required depth for plaster. 3. Where plaster abuts dissimilar materials, terminate with plaster casing bead 1/8-

inch from face of dissimilar material.

C. Install cornerites at plastered interior angles where both converging surfaces are plastered.

1. Do not install where juncture of abutting surfaces is to be unrestrained or where metal lath is continued onto converging surface of an angle at least 4 inches.

2. Fasten along outer edges of lath only and not to structural framing.

D. Apply corner beads, where applicable, at external angles.

E. Wire tying for various members shall be as follows:


1. Splicing: Double wrap tie. 2. Horizontal Stiffeners to Channel Brackets: Figure eight tie. 3. Framing Members Perpendicular to Each Other: Saddle tie.

F. Installation of moldings shall not allow moisture to penetrate behind plaster.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Plaster over metal lath for patching exterior soffits shall be ¾-inch total thickness applied in 3-coats as follows:

1. Scratch Coat: Portland Cement Plaster. 2. Base Coat: Portland Cement Plaster. 3. Finish Coat: Portland Cement Plaster.

3.5 EXECUTION

A. Isolation and Control Joints:

1. Continue control joints in plaster where expansion joints in existing work occur. 2. Where plaster abuts metal trim or other material finishing flush with plaster, form

straight “V” at joint and clean plaster from adjoining surfaces. 3. Provide metal plaster stops where plaster soffit ceilings abut other surfaces.

B. Three Coat Work:

1. Scratch (first) coat shall be applied with sufficient materials and pressure to form good bond and coverage and scratch to a rough surface for brown coat adhesion.

2. Brown (second) coat shall be applied after scratch coat has set firm and hard.

a. Brown coat shall be applied no sooner than 48 hours after application of scratch coat.

b. Plaster screeds for brown coat shall be brought to a level line to establish exact surface of brown coat and used as a guide for rodding.

c. Evenly wet scratch coat with spray or brush immediately before applying brown coat.

d. Bring brown coat out to grounds and straighten to a true surface, compact by floating surface and leave ready to receive finish coat.

3. Finish coat shall be applied to a partially dry brown coat or a thoroughly dry brown coat that has been evenly wetted by spraying or brushing.

a. Application:

1.) Scratch in finish coat with strong trowel pressure over brown coat. 2.) Double back and fill out to a true, even surface. 3.) Allow finish plaster to firm up.

b. Trowel Finish: Steel trowel applied and drawn plaster with clean water to a finish that exactly matches existing plaster soffits ceiling, free from blemishes and irregularities.


A. Patching and Pointing:

1. Upon completion, point-up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets dissimilar materials.

2. Cut out and patch defective, damaged or discolored plaster. 3. Patching shall match existing work in form and texture and shall join smoothly and

neatly with existing and previously applied plaster surfaces.


B. Remove protective materials and plaster materials from adjacent surfaces.

C. Remove stains from plaster surfaces that could affect final paint finish.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer.

B. Ensure plaster work to be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 09100.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09250 – GYPSUM DRYWALL

GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All miscellaneous light gauge steel framing for ceilings and soffits. b. All fasteners and related accessory items necessary to complete the work of

this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Division 7 – Thermal & Moisture Protection. 5. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. It is the intent of this Section to be supplementary to Section 05400, Cold-Formed Metal Framing and any heavy-duty drywall stud framing specified herein shall only be used for miscellaneous framing or interior framing where cold-formed products would not be appropriate to use.


A. Installation: Installation and application of materials specified shall be in accord with latest printed directions and specifications of manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Complete manufacturers’ product data for each product installed under work of this Section including:

1. Gypsum drywall framing systems.

C. Certification and Instructions:

1. Manufacturers’ certification stating that materials furnished comply with standards set forth in these specifications.

2. Manufacturer’s printed instruction for installation.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.

C. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal drywall framing members.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems. b. Consolidated Fabricators Corporation (CONFAB). c. Craco Manufacturing, Inc.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL FRAMING

A. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645, of profile, size, and base metal thickness required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements, with sectional properties computed to conform with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

1. Miscellaneous Framing: 50 ksi, standard duty drywall stud with 1 1/4” wide flange with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

a. Thickness: 19 mil (nominal). b. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0200 inch (25 gauge nominal). c. Depth: 1 5/8", 2 1/2”, 3 5/8” or as otherwise indicated.

2. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with slotted or non-slotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and as follows:

a. Thickness: 25 gauge unless otherwise indicated. b. Face flange: 1 1/4”. c. Wall-attachment flange: 3/4”. d. Depth: 1”, 1 1/2” unless indicated otherwise on drawings or required to fit

conditions of construction.

B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work, at unsupported edges and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.


C. Isolate miscellaneous framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on Drawings:

1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements.

2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

D. Anchor framing tracks so that they do not bridge building expansion and control joints by anchoring tracks to one side only for all runs.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING

A. Install runners (tracks) at all locations where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction.

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing.

C. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.

D. Attach with screws directly to cold-formed framing.

E. Frame openings to comply with details indicated, or if none indicated, in same manner as required for openings.


A. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable products.

B. Remove excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition ready for work by other trades.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer.

B. Ensure drywall framing to be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 09250.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09900 – PAINTING

PAINTING 09900-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Surface preparation for soffit ceilings to be field finished. b. Priming and finish coating indicated for exterior finish. c. Preparation and touch-up of factory finished items. d. Protection of finished construction. e. Cleaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 3. Section 09100 – Lath & Plaster.


A. Included on label of containers:

1. Manufacturer’s name and stock numbers. 2. Type of paint. 3. Color. 4. Label analysis.

B. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Provide primers, under coatings and finish paint products from one manufacturer. 2. Where field touch-up is required on factory finishes, and is acceptable to the

Contracting Officer, provide touch-up materials matching those used by the manufacturer of the product needing touch-up work.

C. Fungus Control: Coatings shall show no fungus growth when tested as specified in Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Method 6271.1.

D. Work shall be done by skilled craftsmen: all paints shall be smoothly and evenly spread on or flowed on and shall be free from runs, sags, crawls, holidays or other defects.

1. All painting shall be done under favorable weather conditions, or conditions suitable for production of good, durable work.

2. No succeeding coats shall be applied until preceding coat is thoroughly dry. 3. No paint is to be applied to a metal surface in temperatures below 50 degrees F.

E. Painter will receive surfaces to be painted or otherwise treated by him, free from foreign matter such as plaster droppings, dirt and grease caused by other crafts and shall be required to do normal sandpapering and cleaning before proceeding with work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

PAINTING 09900-2

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical information, label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use.

1. List each material and cross reference the specific coating and finish system and application.

2. Identify each material by the manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1. Define each separate coat. 2. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 3. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are achieved. 4. Submit samples on the following substrates for Contracting Officer’s review of

color and texture:

a. Painted Plaster: Provide 12” x 12” samples of each color and material on hardboard.


A. Deliver and store products and materials in accordance with provisions of Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number.

C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) and maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. 2. Keep storage area neat and orderly. 3. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 4. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected

from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

B. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other crafts and exterior surfaces not being painted.

PAINTING 09900-3

C. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated.

D. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

E. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Use only the specified products of the following paint manufacturer:

MANUFACTURER CODE

1. Sherwin Williams SHE

B. Use floor sealer for areas not scheduled to receive polished finish or other finish materials as manufactured by Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp, 4226 Kansas Avenue, Kansas City, KS 66016, (913) 233-1750.

C. Materials selected for coating systems shall be from a single manufacturer as specified for areas indicated.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Paint Materials List:

1. Exterior Plaster Primer:

a. SHE: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.

2. Exterior Plaster Finish:

a. SHE: Duration Exterior Acrylic Coating Satin.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING COLORS

A. Colors shall be as indicated on drawings.

B. Tint primer per manufacturer's recommendation for best topcoat color development.

C. Paints and enamels shall be store tinted and mixed.

1. Fungicidal agent shall be incorporated into paint by manufacturer. 2. No materials are to be reduced or changed except as specified by manufacturer.

D. Job mixing and job tinting will not be permitted.

PAINTING 09900-4

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work.

B. Call adverse conditions to attention of Contracting Officer for direction on responsibility for rectifying conditions.

C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. All puttying of cracks, open joints and other defects shall be done after primer or first coat is dry and before second coat is applied.

1. Putty is to be spackling or a similar non-shrinking compound.

B. Consult manufacturers of factory finished items for written instructions on touch-up of primer or finish where touch-up of items is acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitation recommended by paint manufacturer.

B. Test surface with a moisture meter.

C. Apply paint coatings with suitable brushes or rollers.

D. Rate of application shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendation for surface involved and shall be not less than wet mil thickness indicated in 3.5 for various products and surfaces.

E. Keep brushes and rollers clean, dry and free from contaminants and suitable for finish required.

F. Drying time between succeeding coats shall be as recommended by manufacturer of coating.

G. Slightly vary color between succeeding coats.

1. Sand and dust as required between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 3 feet.

2. No runs, blisters, glue spots, checking, crazing or cracking will be allowed.

H. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, roller fibers, streaks, runs, laps or pile up of paints, and skipped or missed areas.

I. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

PAINTING 09900-5

J. Refinish entire soffit ceiling areas where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.

K. Final coat of finish shall not be applied until all other crafts are finished with their work, their materials and debris removed and premises turned over in broomclean condition.

3.4 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Plaster Ceilings: Satin finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of plaster ceiling primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of plaster finish color.

3.5 PAINT THICKNESS

A. Wet thicknesses for various products shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer or as follows, whichever is greater:

1. Plaster Primer – 1.6 mils. 2. Plaser Finish – 2.1 mils.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades and surfaces not being painted.

B. Protect completed work from damage by other trades.

3.7 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP

A. At conclusion of work, remove all empty containers, rags, drop clothes, excess materials and debris from project site.

B. Remove drops, splatters and runs from surfaces not scheduled to receive paint.

C. Touch up or repaint any skips, holidays, mars or thin spots.

END 09900.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10711 – FIXED CANTILEVER FASCIAS

FIXED CANTILEVER FASCIAS 10711-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fixed cantilevered aluminum canopy fascia at new entry portals. b. Aluminum structural components, trim, flashing and accessories. c. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications (Brackets). 4. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB. 5. Section 07920 – Building Joint Sealers.

B. Installed but furnished elsewhere:

1. Work furnished under this Section shall be carefully coordinated with work furnished under Section 05500, Metal Fabrications:

a. Bolted tee and angle connection brackets shall be exactly mounted to supporting structure at locations in precise coordination with shop drawings for fixed sunshades and canopies.

b. Drilling and through-bolting through existing precast concrete spandrel panels to secure tee and angle connection brackets shall be performed in field by Contractor in precise coordination with shop drawings for fixed canopies.

c. Tee and angle connection brackets shall be mounted in place prior to completion of sheathing installation with EIFS material cut to fit and be sealed around brackets.

2. Backer rod and sealant to seal end-to-end outriggers of canopy fascias and to seal around bracket projections through EIFS are specified in Section 07920, Building Joint Sealers.


A. Provide exterior fascia assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses without permanent deformation of assembly or components including loads due to:

1. Dead load. 2. Gravity and lateral live loads, as specified in referenced building codes.

a. Snow. b. Wind. c. Seismic.

B. Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change in ambient and surface temperature of 120 degrees F. and designed to prevent:


1. Buckling. 2. Opening of joints. 3. Overstressing of components. 4. Other detrimental effects.

C. Deflection of assemblies shall be limited to l/480 under live load conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340.

1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical and descriptive data on canopy components and assemblies.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Overall plan showing location of each item. b. Dimensioned plans, elevations and sections. c. Large scale details illustrating:

1.) Dimensioned profiles of components including outriggers, nosing, primary tee and angle bracket connections.

2.) Dimensioned supporting components as assembled. 3.) Indicate breaks required to prevent electrolysis between ferrous and

non-ferrous metals. 4.) Indicate connection requirements at supporting structure.

d. Provide unit dimensions related to supporting and adjoining structures and other construction.

3. Samples:

a. Provide two (2) sets of manufacturer’s high performance fluoropolymer coating color chips on actual metal illustrating the full range of colors indicated for awning components and assemblies.

b. Provide two (2) 3-inch long finished samples of each visible component including nosing and outriggers.

c. Provide two (2) stainless steel threaded rods of the type and design intended for use in connecting tee brackets to existing precast concrete spandrel supports.

B. Structural Calculations:

1. Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads including dead, live and thermal movement.

a. Results of structural analysis shall be provided by Contractor for use to develop shop drawings for awning and canopy support brackets.

b. Coordination of various fabricators and manufacturers shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Structural analysis and design calculations shall be sealed and signed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s 5-year warranty covering structural integrity of assemblies against excessive deflection under design loading, excessive joint movement under thermal loading and against manufacturing defects.


B. Provide manufacturer’s 20-year warranty covering high performance fluoropolymer coating system covering color retention, adhesion and weather resistance to chalking and fading.


A. Verify actual supporting and adjoining construction by field measurements prior to fabrication.

B. Coordinate supporting and adjoining construction to ensure that sunshade and awning assemblies fit properly and are structurally supported as designed.

C. Schedule delivery to avoid delays in construction progress.

1. Where field dimensions cannot be made without delaying work provide guaranteed dimensions and proceed with fabrication of assemblies.

2. Coordinate related and supporting construction to ensure that assemblies fit properly and are structurally supported as designed using established dimensions.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Provide materials in accordance with Section 01600.

B. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01620.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide products as manufactured by the following approved manufacturers:

1. All-Lite Architectural Products 5101 Blue Mound Road Fort Worth, TX 76106 (817) 509-2300

2. AGS Inc. 9950 W. 190th Street Mokena, IL 60448 (708) 479-9458

3. Perfection Architectural Systems, Inc 2310 Mercator Drive Orlando Fl. 32807 (407) 671-6225

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-TB or T2.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, ally 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26 M, alloy 319.

D. Fasteners: Same as basic metal and alloy being fastened or 300 series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.


1. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 2. Use types and sizes as indicated and to suit installation conditions. 3. Provide flat head Phillips, Torx or Allen type screws in matching color for exposed

fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bolts: 300 series stainless steel in size as required by design loading.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation requirements.

2.3 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Assemble cantilever fascia assemblies in factory to minimize field splicing and field assembly.

1. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation at job site.

B. Assemblies shall only be assembled in field under strict compliance with manufacturers written recommendations and instructions.

C. Maintain equal outrigger spacing to produce a uniform appearance.

D. Include supports, anchorage and accessories required for complete assembly.

2.4 FIXED ALUMINUM CANTILEVER FASCIA

A. Units shall be horizontal, fixed, extruded aluminum assemblies as indicated, designed to provide aesthetic appeal at new building entry portals, and complying with the following design characteristics:

1. Nosing: 12-inch deep rectangular aluminum tube. 2. Outriggers: Flat bar. 3. Connections: Semi-concealed aluminum tee and angle sections.

B. Units shall be designed to cantilever from face of existing precast concrete spandrel fascias as indicated using tee and angle shaped aluminum brackets through-bolted though spandrels.

1. Aluminum tee brackets shall be located as indicated. 2. Provide aluminum angle brackets at ends of assemblies to fit in vertical clearance

joint provided in building materials.

C. Assemblies shall be modular with end outriggers of adjacent units sandwiching the aluminum bracket and through bolted to secure fascia assembly to bracket.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Provide high performance fluoropolymer coating complying with AAMA 2605.

B. Prepare, pre-treat and apply coatings to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions.

C. All exposed components of assemblies shall be finished in Dark Bronze color as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer's full range of high performance fluoropolymer coatings.


3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION & COORDINATION

A. Inspect areas to receive cantiler fascia assemblies for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Coordinate Shop Drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for:

1. Drilling, back-plating and through-bolting through existing precast concrete spandrels for receiving bracket anchor bolts.

C. Commence installation of assemblies only when all inspections have been made and it is verified that assemblies can be mounted as designed without binding or deformation of components.

D. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place cantilever fascia assemblies level and plumb, in strict compliance with approved Shop Drawings, and in alignment with adjacent construction.

B. Provide concealed and semi-concealed anchorages wherever possible.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding.

1. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. 2. Replace items that cannot be finished in the field to the satisfaction of the

Contracting Officer or designated representative.

E. Protect non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coat of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, structural steel or dissimilar metals.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect assemblies from damage during construction with temporary protective coverings as approved by the sunshade/awning manufacturer.

B. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of assemblies that are not protected by temporary coverings to remove fingerprints and soil during installation.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and clean sunshade, fascia and awning assemblies in accordance with manufacturer’s written instruction.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion perform final cleaning and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating furnished by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

END 10711.

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16060 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Interior demolition, removal and abandonment of interior electrical systems, including communications and special systems including fire alarm and telephone.

B. Cleaning and repair of existing equipment to remain.


A. Division 01 - Selective Demolition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching work: As specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Contracting Officer before disturbing existing installation.

D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. E. Contractor shall verify and or test ballasts, transformers, and other devices or equipment to be

removed do not contain and PCB or other hazardous materials requiring special disposal. Contractor is responsible for all testing and disposal costs.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during all

phases of construction.

C. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from STORE MANAGER at least 5 working days before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 DEMOLITION EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Demolish existing electrical work under provisions of Division 01, and this Section.

B. Remove existing installations to accommodate requirements for new construction.

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-2

C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply or next active device to remain.

D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling

finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.

F. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other

accessories.

G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work.

H. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

I. Support existing conduits, boxes and cables above ceilings or on walls to be removed if those

systems are existing to remain.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide new typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

END OF SECTION 16060

CONDUIT 16111-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Electrical metallic tubing. D. Fittings and conduit bodies.


A. Division 07 – Roofing Penetrations. B. Division 07 – Firestopping.

C. Section 16130 – Boxes.

D. Section 16170 – Grounding and Bonding.

E. Section 16190 – Supporting Devices.

F. Section 16195 – Electrical Identification.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Conduit and tubing shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of following

standards: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit

and Cable Assemblies. 4. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 5. NECA "Standard of Installation."

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. Limit conductor cross sectional area to no more than 40%

of conduit cross sectional area.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal

conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, conduit bodies.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

CONDUIT 16111-2

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Accurately record actual routing of interior conduits larger than 2 inches on project record

documents and of all underground conduits regardless of size. For locations of underground conduits provide dimensions indicating locations and depth.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown schematically on Drawings unless dimensioned. Route as

required to complete wiring system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: ¾” inch unless otherwise specified. B. Wet and Damp Interior Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or

electrical metallic tubing. Use wet and/or damp location fittings. D. Dry Interior Locations Above Floor Slab (Including Hollow Stud Partitions): 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic

tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit, threaded

connections.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.

CONDUIT 16111-3

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type or set screw type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Provide supports as required by NEC maximum distance between conduit support tables.

Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers,

clevis hangers, and split hangers. Where possible, support conduits in ceiling cavity space at the level of structural roof joists.

E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;

provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section

16190. DO NOT SUPPORT CONDUITS DIRECTLY FROM ROOF DECK. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Fasten individual conduits to roof joists. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding

104 degrees F. N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends before joining. O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and

wet locations and to cast boxes. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit

bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. R. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit

system.

CONDUIT 16111-4

S. Provide expansion/deflection couplings to accommodate expansion and deflection where

conduit crosses seismic joints or expansion joints. Such couplings shall have braided copper bonding jumpers.

T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves less than 20 feet long

and nipples. U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. V. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. W. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. Z. AC and MC cable shall only be acceptable for use per 16123. AA. Paint exposed conduit to match adjacent surface. Coordinate color selections with

Architect.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods under the provisions of Division 07. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack

with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.


BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE


A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable type.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section

with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish building wire and wiring connectors listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.


B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. C. Wire and cable routing indicated is schematic unless dimensioned.

1.9 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact

routing and lengths required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN-2/THWN-2. E. Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral and ground: Insulation: 1. 480/277 volt circuits: brown, orange, yellow, grey, green with white stripe.

2.2 METAL CLAD (MC) CABLE INSTALLATIONS

A. Type MC cable installation shall be in accordance with the following: No more than six (6) total current-carrying conductors in multiple MC cable runs shall be bundled together into a single MC cable hanger dedicated to indicate what the circuits are for. Wireway or ladder type tray with dual supports may also be used to support MC cable with fill as allowed by the NEC. Neutrals shall be counted as current-carrying conductors. Do not utilize communications tray for branch circuit supports.

B. MC cable shall be run parallel or perpendicular to walls. No diagonal runs shall be

permitted. C. Maintain a clearance of a least 6 inches from hot water and other high-temperature pipes

and telecommunications conduits, and at least 12 inches from unshielded twisted-pair telecommunications cables.

D. The arrangement of MC cables and fastening methods shall be subject to the approval of

the Contracting Officer’s representative. Securely support all MC cable with cable hangers, individual spring steel support clips, steel trapeze hangers, threaded rods or dedicated No. 8 AWG drop wires. Cable supports shall be fastened to concrete slabs, beams, joists or other structural members of the building. Do not support MC cable on hung ceilings or on ceiling support wires. The use of cable ties to support MC cable is prohibited.

E. Support MC cable every 4 feet and within 1 foot of every box, panelboard, fitting, or cable

termination. F. All MC cables, passing through fire-rated walls or electrical/telecommunications room wall

shall be provided with a UL listed, fire-rated penetration assembly.


G. Install cable to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using UL listed materials and methods.

H. All conduit shall be run concealed in walls or above ceilings. It shall not be used in poured

concrete walls, floors, or roofs; CMU walls; in earth; or where subject to physical damage. I. Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral, and ground.

1. 277/480 volt circuits: brown, orange, yellow, gray, green.

J. Cables run down walls shall terminate in junction box before making equipment connection in liquid tight whip.

K. MC cable installation shall only be used for 20A and 30A branch circuits. L. Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG regardless of use. See Section 16111. M. Provide anti-short bushings at all termination points to prevent wire contact with sharp metal. N. MC cables shall be run horizontally above ceilings and vertically in wall voids. No

horizontal runs with-in wall voids shall be allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Use wiring methods indicated. B. All branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be installed in raceways.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. C. Use solid conductors for #12 and smaller, stranded conductors #10 and larger. D. Use stranded conductors for power circuits. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.


F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. G. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for fused control circuits. H. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120

volt branch circuits with homeruns longer than 75 feet. I. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277

volt branch circuits with homeruns longer than 200 feet. J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. L. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. M. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. N. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise. O. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

P. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices

and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. Q. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and

taps, 10 AWG and smaller. R. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each

conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.


BOXES 16130-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16130 - BOXES


A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, materials, and accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project

record documents.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment

supported; include male fixture studs where required. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box

manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

BOXES 16130-2

C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16141.

2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160. C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted

junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover

screws.


A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,

equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. E. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. F. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. G. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices as specified in Section 16141. H. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. I. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas

only. J. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from

ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. K. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. L. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches,

and backsplashes. M. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. N. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in all areas except mechanical rooms, mezzanines, and

electrical closets. M. Secure flush mounting boxes. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

After finished wall material is applied, provide box extensions for all boxes with setback more than 1/8 inch.

N. Install flush mounting box without damaging insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

BOXES 16130-3

O. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. P. DO NOT FASTEN BOXES TO CEILING SUPPORT WIRES OR DIRECTLY TO ROOF

DECK. Q. Support boxes independently of conduit. R. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional

box. Provide metal barrier plates between gangs to separate line voltage from low voltage systems and where voltage between adjacent light switches exceeds 300 volts.

S. Use 4” square box with plaster ring for single device outlets. T. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather, interiors of walk-in

refrigeration equipment, and wet locations. Provide vapor seals at conduit entrances to these boxes. Use U.L. listed sealing compound.

U. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast

metal box in other locations. V. Identify all junction boxes by panel and circuit number on outside cover with legible

permanent ink marker on outside face of cover.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected to allow accessibility of box

and proper operation of equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. D. Check boxes for the presence of drywall screws, concrete residue, and other sharp

objects. Remove all sharp objects. END OF SECTION 16130

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING


A. Equipment grounding conductors. B. Bonding.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Burndy or approved equal. B. Material: Bronze.

2.2 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. Unless noted otherwise, provide with green insulation. B. Size: As required by NEC.

2.3 GROUND BUSHING/LUG

A. Insulated metallic grounding bushings, tin-plated open-type lug dual rated for CU-AL conductors, thermoplastic liners rated 105 degree C, die cast zinc, to provide a smooth, well-rounded bearing surface for wires or cable at the end of threaded conduit or a conduit connector as required by the NEC.


A. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-2

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each

feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.


SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES


A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads

of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system or expansion anchors

and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and

hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-2

2.2 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: Unistrut (P1000 unless otherwise noted) or approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized or painted steel. (1-5/8” square.)


A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of

Installation", NFPA 70 and maximum distance between conduit support tables. C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling support wires, and

conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. F. Do not drill or cut structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use

hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards

one inch off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards

recessed in hollow partitions.


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16195 - IDENTIFICATION


A. Nameplates. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

Screw on type with two self tapping screws. Mastic type nameplates not allowed. B. Locations: 1. Relays and contactors. Indicate loads controlled. 2. Time switches. Indicate load controlled. 3. Where noted on plans. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads such as safety

switches, motor starters, and relays. 2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads such as

panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers.

2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-2

B. Locations: Each conductor at distribution equipment panelboard gutters, pull boxes,

outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder circuit number. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number corresponding to applicable control

schematics.

2.3 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Location: Conduit couplings and junction box covers shall be painted to indicate system

that conduit serves. B. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09910. D. Field paint colored couplings on each conduit longer than 6 feet and conduit stubs. E. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange


LUMINAIRES 16510-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16510 - LUMINAIRES


A. Luminaires and accessories. B. Drivers

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI ANSLG – LED Driver Performance. B. IES LM-79 – LED lamp and luminaire performance C. IES LM-85 - LED Package Characteristics. D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. G. UFC 3-350-01 Change 3, 01 June 2016 H. UFC 3-520-01 14 October 2015

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a

standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittal: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. C. Warranty for LEDs, drivers and emergency standby drivers shall be Ten (10) years from

date of substantial completion.

LUMINAIRES 16510-2

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish products as scheduled. Contractors wishing to submit voluntary substitutions shall

submit complete cut sheet information showing fixture dimensions, options and photometrics. Alternate fixtures must be received at engineers’ office minimum two weeks prior to bidding. Engineers’ evaluation shall be final. Fixtures submitted without prior approval will be returned to contractor without comment.

B. Luminaires shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): a. Interior luminaires shall be nominal 3500K (per LM-79 Test).

2. Color Rendering Index (CRI):

a. Interior luminaires: >80, R9>0 (per LM-79 Test).

3. Luminaire efficacy: >100 Lumens per Watt (LPW). 4. Reported L90* > 60,000 hours. 5. Dual rated 120-277V 60 Hz. 6. Transient Protection: 100kHz ring wave, 2kV level. 7. Total current harmonic distortion: < 20%. 8. Power Factor (PF): > 0.9. 9. Class 2, replaceable, high efficiency LED driver rated for 60,000 hours. 10. Design Lights Consortium (DLC) qualified. 11. Underwriter Laboratory (UL) listed. 12. Electrical components shall be assessable from below the ceiling. 13. Modularly replaceable drivers.

*Lumen Maintenance at 25 deg C ambient temperature shall be based on calculations per The Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) standard, TM-21 and performed by an accredited National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) laboratory. C. Warranty: 1. 10 YEARS

2.2 LED Drivers A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers Standard complying with ANSI ANSLG requirements.

LUMINAIRES 16510-3

B. Warranty: 1. Drivers shall be rated for a minimum operation of 60,000 hours

2.3 LED Standby Drivers

A. Manufacturers: Bodine, ITOA or approved equal. B. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast

compartment of fluorescent luminaire or for remote mounting. C. Ratings: As shown on fixture schedule. D. Battery: Sealed pure lead type, rated for 10 year life. Provide 3 year full warranty. E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from

the outside of an assembled luminaire.


A. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. B. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. C. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. D. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions within luminaire. E. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection

and operation.

3.3 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prior to final acceptance, relamp luminaires that have failed lamps.


TESTING 16950-1

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16950 - TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide:

1. Testing of electrical components and systems: a. Continuity test. b. Voltage test.

2. Test reports. 3. Correction of defective components or systems. 4. Retest of corrected components, systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Submit seven (7) copies of all test reports to Contracting Officer.

1. Type each test report on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch paper. Include: a. Project Number. b. Project title and location. c. Test performed. d. Date performed. e. Test equipment used. f. Contractor's name, address and telephone number. g. Testing firm's name, address and telephone number if other than

Contractor. h. Name (s) and title (s) of person (s):

1. Performing test. 2. Observing test.

i. Statement verifying each test. j. Nameplate data from each motor and equipment item tested. k. Test results. l. Retest results after correction of defective components, systems.

2. For each copy, assemble all test reports and bind them in a folder. Label each folder,

"Electrical Test Reports". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Furnish all equipment, manpower and casual labor to perform specified testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING: Conduct tests and adjust equipment to verify compliance with specified performance. 3.3 CONTINUITY TESTS: Test branch circuits and control circuits to determine continuity of wiring and

connections.

3.9 CORRECTION OF DEFECTS

TESTING 16950-2

A. When tests disclose any unsatisfactory workmanship or equipment furnished under this

Contract, correct defects and retest. Repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained.

B. When any wiring or equipment is damaged by tests, repair or replace such wiring or equipment. Test repaired items to ensure satisfactory operation.
